Yamaha RX-V4600 - AV Receiver Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V4600 - AV Receiver

Categorie: Ontvanger

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

RX-V4600

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V4600

Printed in Malaysia WF09590

RX-V4600

AV R e c e i ve r

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V4600_U-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, March 16, 2005 10:08 AM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may

cause the product and cart combination to

overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in

performance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

iii

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage

resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than

specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the AC power

cable and disconnect the antenna cable when there is an

electrical storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on

common operating errors before concluding that this unit is

faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit

in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from

the wall outlet.

18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC main supply. Voltages are:

General model .............AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

Asia model ................................AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is

often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group

recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power

source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,

even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called

the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to

consume a very small quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la

plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de

la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à

la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

FEATURES............................................................. 2

GETTING STARTED............................................ 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 3

Installing batteries in the remote controls.................. 4

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 5

Front panel ................................................................. 5

Remote control........................................................... 7

Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control ................................... 9

Using the remote controls.......................................... 9

Front panel display .................................................. 10

Rear panel ................................................................ 12

SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 13

Speaker placement ................................................... 13

Speaker connections ................................................ 15

CONNECTIONS .................................................. 18

Before connecting components................................ 18

Connecting video components................................. 19

Connecting audio components................................. 22

Connecting the antennas .......................................... 24

Connecting the power cable..................................... 25

Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 26

Turning on the power............................................... 26

AUTO SETUP....................................................... 27

Introduction.............................................................. 27

Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 27

Starting the setup ..................................................... 28

Confirming the results ............................................. 30

PLAYBACK.......................................................... 33

Basic operations....................................................... 33

Selecting sound field programs ............................... 34

Additional operations............................................... 35

Selecting audio input modes .................................... 40

TUNING ................................................................ 41

Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 41

Presetting stations .................................................... 42

Selecting preset stations........................................... 44

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 44

Using HD Radio

™

................................................... 45

HD Radio

™

tuning................................................... 45

Selecting HD Radio

™

audio programs .................... 46

Displaying HD Radio

™

information ....................... 46

RECORDING ....................................................... 47

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

DESCRIPTIONS .............................................. 48

For movie/video sources.......................................... 48

For music sources .................................................... 50

ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................51

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 51

SYSTEM OPTIONS .............................................52

Changing parameter settings ................................... 54

Input Select .............................................................. 55

Manual Setup (Sound) ............................................. 58

Manual Setup (Basic) .............................................. 61

Manual Setup (Option) ............................................ 66

System Memory....................................................... 69

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................70

Control area ............................................................. 70

Setting remote control codes ................................... 71

Programming codes from other

remote controls (Learn) ....................................... 73

Changing source names in the display window....... 75

Using the Macro feature .......................................... 76

Clearing function sets .............................................. 78

Clearing individual functions .................................. 79

Controlling each component.................................... 81

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 ...................................................82

Zone 2/Zone 3 connections...................................... 82

Controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 from the front panel ..... 83

Controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 using

the remote control................................................ 84

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS ..................86

Advanced setup menu.............................................. 86

Front panel display system options menu................ 87

USING i.LINK.......................................................91

What is i.LINK? ...................................................... 91

Connecting i.LINK components.............................. 91

Basic i.LINK operations .......................................... 92

Changing i.LINK Select parameters........................ 92

i.LINK display messages ......................................... 94

USING HDMI........................................................95

What is HDMI? ....................................................... 95

Connecting HDMI components............................... 96

Basic HDMI operations ........................................... 97

Changing HDMI parameters.................................... 97

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......99

What is a sound field? ............................................. 99

Changing parameter settings ................................... 99

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER

DESCRIPTIONS.............................................100

TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................105

GLOSSARY.........................................................110

Audio formats ........................................................ 110

Sound field programs............................................. 111

Audio information ................................................. 111

Video signal information ....................................... 113

PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER

INFORMATION .............................................114

SPECIFICATIONS.............................................115

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

FEATURES

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS Output Power

(0.04% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω)

Front: 130 W + 130 W

Center: 130 W

Surround: 130 W + 130 W

Surround Back: 130 W + 130 W

Sound field features

◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of

sound fields

◆ THX Select2

◆ SRS CS (U.S.A. model only)

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1,

DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic /

Dolby Pro Logic x decoder

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

™

Sophisticated AM/FM tuner

◆ 40-station random access preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

◆ HD Radio

™

digital broadcast reception capability

Other features

◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer for automatic speaker setup

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ GUI (graphical user interface) menus that allow you to

optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video

system

◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete

multi-channel input

◆ Short message function

◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog,

DSD, PCM and multi-channel PCM sources

◆ S-video signal input/output capability

◆ Component video input/output capability

◆ Video signal conversion (composite video ↔

S-video → component video) capability for monitor

out

◆ i.LINK interface for direct digital transfer of digital

audio signals

◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or

high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital

audio

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Sleep timer

◆ Cinema and music night listening mode

◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and

learning/macro capability

◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility

◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control for controlling

Zone 2/Zone 3 components connected to this unit

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc.

In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of

Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

HD Radio

™

technology manufactured under license from

iBiquity Digital Corporation. “iBiquity Digital” and the “HD

Radio” and “HD” symbols are registered trademarks of iBiquity

Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.

“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks of Sony

Corporation.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

Circle Surround , Dialog Clarity, TruBass, SRS and the

symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.

Circle Surround , Dialog Clarity and TruBass technologies are

incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.

The THX logo is a trademark of THX Ltd. which may be

FEATURES

GETTING STARTED

INTRODUCTION

Please check that you received all of the following parts.

GETTING STARTED

Supplied accessories

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

EXIT

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERSMEMORY

PRESET

TUNER CD CD-R

POWER

STANDBY

DTV

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

–

MUTE

DISPLAY

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

VOLUME

ZONE 3ZONE 2

ID2ID1

Remote control

Batteries (4)

(AAA, LR03)

Zone 2/Zone 3

remote control

Batteries (2)

(AAA, R03)

AM loop antenna

(Canada, Asia,

General, China, Korea,

Australia, U.K. and

Europe models)

Optimizer microphone

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna

adapter (U.K. model only)

Speaker terminal

wrench

Power cable

Indoor FM antenna

(Australia, U.K. and

Europe models)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A., Canada, Asia,

General, China and

Korea models)

AM loop antenna

(U.S.A. model)

GETTING STARTED

Notes on batteries

• Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not

flash, or its light or display window become dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these

different types of batteries may have the same shape and color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

■ Remote control

1 Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, LR03)

according to the polarity markings on the

inside of the battery compartment.

3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

■ Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control

1 Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

2 Insert two supplied batteries (AAA, R03)

according to the polarity markings (+ and –)

on the inside of the battery compartment.

3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

Installing batteries in the remote controls

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the remote control code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns on the main unit only or sets it to the standby mode.

When you turn on the main unit, there will be a 6 to 7

second delay before the main unit can reproduce sound.

• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote

control.

• You can turn on the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 or set them to

the standby mode simultaneously using the remote control.

For details, see page 85.

2 INPUT selector

Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.

3 AUDIO SELECT

Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack

(AUTO, i.LINK, HDMI, COAX/OPT, ANALOG) when

one component is connected to two or more input jacks on

this unit (see page 40).

4 MULTI CH INPUT

Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes

priority over the source selected with the INPUT selector

(or the input selector buttons on the remote control).

5 A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when

the unit is in the tuner mode (see page 44).

6 PRESET/TUNING l / h

Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the unit is in the

tuner mode and the colon (:) is displayed next to the band

indication in the front panel display.

Selects the tuning frequency when the unit is in the tuner

mode and the colon (:) is not displayed.

See pages 41 to 44 for details.

7 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

8 PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h

between selecting preset station numbers and tuning when

the unit is in the tuner mode (see pages 41 to 44).

9 FM/AM

Switches the reception band (FM or AM) when the unit is

in the tuner mode (see page 41).

0 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a station in the memory when the unit is in the tuner

mode. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to

start automatic preset tuning (see pages 42 to 43).

A TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L)

Switches the tuning mode between automatic (“AUTO”

indicator on) and manual (“AUTO” indicator off) when

the unit is in the tuner mode.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

SPEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDI O

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

MAIN ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/

TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

STANDBY

/ON

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR 2

FI MNLKJHG

1 2 34 5 6 7 890A B D E

Notes

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

B STRAIGHT/EFFECT

Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is

selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are

output directly from their respective speakers without

effect processing.

C Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote controls.

D TONE CONTROL

Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right

and center channels (see page 35).

E PURE DIRECT

Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode. Lights up when

turned on (see page 38).

F REC OUT/ZONE 2

Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video

recorder and ZONE 2 outputs independently of the source

you are listening to or watching in the main room. When

set to the SOURCE/REMOTE position, the input source is

directed to all outputs. The source in Zone 2 and the

source you record are always identical.

G OPTIMIZER MIC jack

Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied

microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function

(see page 27).

H SPEAKERS A/B

Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the

A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the

corresponding button is pressed.

I PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals

are output at the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers.

All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down

to the front left and right channels.

J VIDEO AUX jacks

Input audio and video signals from an external source

such as a game console. To reproduce source signals at

these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source.

K ZONE ON/OFF

MAIN

Turns on the power of the main unit or sets it to the

standby mode (see page 83).

ZONE 2

Turns on the power of Zone 2 or sets it to the standby

mode (see page 83).

ZONE 3

Turns on the power of Zone 3 or sets it to the standby

mode (see page 83).

L ZONE CONTROL

Press to control the input or adjust the volume level for the

currently selected zone (the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3)

(see page 83). After you press ZONE CONTROL, the

indicator for the currently selected zone flashes in the

front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. While the

indicator is flashing, perform the desired operation.

M PROGRAM selector

Use to select sound field programs or adjust bass/treble

balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL).

N VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the REC OUT level.

■ Opening and closing the front panel

door

When you want to use the controls behind the front panel

door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of

the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these

controls.

To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

This section describes the function of each control on the

remote control used to control this unit. To operate other

components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on

page 70. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to operate this

unit.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 Transmission indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

3 Input selector buttons

Select the input source and change the control area.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE, then press TUNER

to select the TUNER mode.

4 Display window

Shows the name of the selected source component that

you can control.

5 LIGHT button

Press to light up remote control buttons and display

window.

6 TOP, BAND

Displays the top screen in the graphical user interface

(GUI) menu on your video monitor when

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP.

Switches the reception band (FM or AM) when

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in

the tuner mode.

7 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h / ENTER

Use to select and adjust DSP program parameters or GUI

menu items when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP.

Press l / h to select a preset station group (A to E) when

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in

the tuner mode.

Press k / n to select a preset station number (1 to 8) when

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in

the tuner mode.

8 RETURN

Returns to the upper directory when in the front panel

display menu mode.

9 Sound field program / numeric buttons

Use to select sound field programs or input numbers when

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP.

Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in

the tuner mode.

Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in

multi-channel format (see page 37).

Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 channel

playback of multi-channel software (see page 36).

0 MEMORY 1/2

Use to recall favorite sound field programs, YPAO

settings or additional preset stations (see page 69).

A MACRO ON/OFF

Turns the macro function on and off.

Remote control

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

EXIT

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERSMEMORY

PRESET

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

B MACRO

Use to program a series of operations for control by a

single button (see page 76).

C STANDBY

Sets this unit in the standby mode.

D SYSTEM POWER

Turns on the power of this unit.

E AUDIO SELECT

Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack

(AUTO, i.LINK, HDMI, COAX/OPT, ANALOG) when

one component is connected to two or more input jacks on

this unit (see page 40).

F SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

G MULTI CH IN

Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external

decoder (etc.).

H SELECT k / n

Selects another component that you can control

independently of the input component selected with the

input selector buttons.

I VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

J AMP/SOURCE/TV

Selects the component you want to control with the

remote control.

AMP: Set to this position to operate this unit.

SOURCE: Set to this position to operate the component

selected with an input selector button.

TV: Set to this position to operate the television.

To set the remote control codes for components, see

page 71.

K MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to

the previous volume level.

L PURE DIRECT

Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 38).

M EXIT, PRG SELECT

Use to exit the graphical user interface (GUI) mode when

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP.

(U.S.A. model only)

Selects the HD Radio audio program when

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in

the tuner mode (see page 46).

N NIGHT

Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 38).

O DISPLAY

Use to enter into the front panel display menu mode when

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP.

(U.S.A. model only)

Toggles between HD Radio information displays when

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in

the tuner mode (see page 46).

P STRAIGHT/EFFECT

Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is

selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are

output directly from their respective speakers without

effect processing.

Q SPEAKERS A/B

Use to turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to

the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel when

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP, then the corresponding

button is pressed each time.

R RE-NAME

Used to change the input source name in the display

window (see page 75).

S CLEAR

Used to clear functions acquired when using the learn,

macro and rename features, or setting remote control

codes (see page 78).

T LEARN

Used to set up the remote control code or program

functions from other remote controls (see page 73).

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

This section describes the controls and functions of the

Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control. Use the Zone 2/Zone 3

remote control to control components connected to this

unit in Zone 2 (the second room) or Zone 3 (the third

room).

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 POWER

Turns on the power of this unit.

3 STANDBY

Sets this unit in the standby mode.

4 Input selector buttons

Select the input source and change the control area.

5 PRESET/CH k / n

Press k / n to select a preset station number (1 to 8) when

the unit is in tuner mode.

6 VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

7 MUTE

Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the

MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio

output to the previous volume level.

8 A/B/C/D/E

Press repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E)

when the unit is in tuner mode.

9 DISPLAY

Use to enter into the front panel display menu mode.

(U.S.A. model only)

Toggles between HD Radio information displays when the

unit is in the tuner mode (see page 46).

0 PRG SELECT

(U.S.A. model only)

Selects the HD Radio audio program when the unit is in

the tuner mode (see page 46).

A ID1/ID2

Slide to set the remote control AMP/tuner ID for this unit

(see page 72).

B ZONE 2/ZONE 3

Slide to set the operation of this unit to Zone 2 or Zone 3

(see page 82).

The remote controls transmit a directional infrared ray.

Be sure to aim the remote controls directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

■ Handling the remote controls

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

controls.

• Do not drop the remote controls.

• Do not leave or store the remote controls in the

following types of conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or

stove

– extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control

TUNER CD CD-R

POWER

STANDBY

DTV

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

–

MUTE

DISPLAY

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

VOLUME

ZONE 3ZONE 2

ID2ID1

Using the remote controls

SPEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

MAIN ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/

TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

STANDBY

/ON

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR2

30 30

TUNER CD CD-R

POWER

STANDBY

DTV

CBL/SATMD/TAPE

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

–

MUTE

DISPLAY

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

VOLUME

ZONE 3ZONE 2

ID2ID1

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

EXIT

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERSMEMORY

PRESET

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

1 i.LINK indicator

Lights up when an i.LINK component is connected, and

this unit is playing back signals input via i.LINK

connections.

Flashes when an i.LINK component is connected, but this

unit is playing back signals input via connections other

than i.LINK or no signals are being input via i.LINK

connections.

Turns off when no i.LINK component is connected.

See page 94 for details.

2 HDMI indicator

Lights up when an HDMI component is connected, and

this unit is playing back audio signals input via HDMI

connections.

Flashes when an HDMI component is connected, but this

unit is playing back audio signals input via connections

other than HDMI or no audio signals are being input via

HDMI connections.

Turns off when no HDMI component is connected.

See page 96 for details.

3 NIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select night listening mode.

4 VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active

(see page 39).

5 Sound field indicators

Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields.

6 Input source indicators

A cursor lights to show the current input source.

7 CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field

program.

8 YPAO indicator

Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the

auto setup speaker settings are used without any

modifications.

9 AUTO indicator

Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.

0 STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.

A HD Radio indicator

(U.S.A. model only)

Lights up when this unit is tuned into the HD Radio

reception band.

B VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the volume level.

C Decoder indicators

When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective

indicator lights up.

D DSD indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (direct

stream digital) digital audio signals.

E PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

F SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

G ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators

Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 power is on.

H THX indicator

Lights up when a THX program is selected.

I STANDARD indicator

Lights up when a decoder is selected (see page 37).

J Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

Front panel display

MUTE

VOLUME

MATRIX

DISCRETE

STANDARD

NIGHT

VIRTUAL

SLEEP

ZONE3

ZONE2

CINEMA

SILENT

HiFi DSP

MEMORY

TUNED

YPAO

AUTO

STEREO

A B

LFE

96/24

LL C R

SL SB SR

MULTI CH

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

DIGITAL

PCM

DSD

THX

PL x

13 4 5 6 78 90AB

CDEFHIJKL M N OPQRS

Presence DSP sound field

Listening position

Left surround

DSP sound field

Right surround

DSP sound field

Surround/surround back DSP sound field

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

K SP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.

Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are

selected, or when bi-wiring.

L SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 36).

M Multi-information display

Shows the current sound field program name and other

information when adjusting or changing settings.

N HiFi DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field

program.

O MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show a station can be stored.

P TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.

Q MUTE indicator

Flashes while the MUTE function is on.

R 96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

S LFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal.

T Input channel indicators

Indicate the channel components of current digital input

signal.

U Presence and surround back speaker

indicators

Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back

speakers when using the Auto Setup setting (page 27) or

Speaker Level setting (page 65).

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

See page 22 for details.

2 i.LINK connectors

See page 91 for connection information.

3 Antenna terminals

See page 24 for connection information.

4 Video component jacks

See pages 19 and 21 for connection information.

5 Audio component jacks

See page 22 for connection information.

6 Speaker terminal wrench hook

Use to store the speaker terminal wrench when not in use.

7 RS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only.

Consult you dealer for details.

8 REMOTE 1/2 IN/OUT jacks

See page 82 for details.

9 CONTROL OUT jacks

These are control expansion terminals for factory use only.

0 AC OUTLETS

Use to supply power to your other A/V components

(see page 25).

A AC INLET

Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable

(see page 25).

B DIGITAL INPUT jacks

See pages 19, 21 and 22 for details.

C HDMI IN/OUT connectors

See page 95 for connection information.

D ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks

See page 82 for details.

E MULTI CH INPUT jacks

See page 20 for connection information.

F PRE OUT jacks

See page 23 for connection information.

G Speaker terminals

See page 15 for connection information.

H PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals

See page 15 for connection information.

Rear panel

GND

SPEAKERS

FRONT

SURROUND

FRONT

CENTER

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE

SURROUND

CLASS 2 WIRING

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

SURROUND BACK SINGLE

CENTER

SINGLE

(SB)

MONITOR

OUT

AUDIOVIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

DTV

CBL/

SAT

VIDEO

OUT

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

ZONE 2

CENTERSUBWOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

OUTPUT

AUDIO

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

PHONO

SURROUND

TUNER

HDMI

(AUDIO)

S400

IN 1

IN 2

OUT

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

ANT

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

DVD

COAXIAL

–

––

–

RS-232C

DVR/VCR 2

CONTROL OUTREMOTE

IN IN OUT

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

PBY

DVD

DTV

CBL/

SAT

+12V 15mA MAX.

PRESENCE/ZONE 2

ZONE 3

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

AC IN

12 3 4 5 67 8 9 0 A

BC D E F G H

(U.S.A. model)

SPEAKER SETUP

PREPARATION

The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R

speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP,

multi-channel audio sources and THX.

ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union).

Front speakers (FR and FL)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus

effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from

the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker

from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical

to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,

however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front

face of the center speaker with the front face of your video

monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front

speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as

directly over or under it.

Surround speakers (SR and SL)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening

position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above

the floor.

Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL)

The surround back speakers supplement the surround

speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back

transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the

listening position and at the same height as the surround

speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)

apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width

as the front speakers.

Subwoofer

The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active

Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only

for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,

but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and

DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so

critical, because low bass sounds are not highly

directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the

front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the

room to reduce wall reflections.

Presence speakers (PR and PL)

Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front

speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA

DSP (see page 48). These effects include sounds that

filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the

screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place

these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 – 1 m

(1 – 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly

inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.

Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound

simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in

the Sound menu (see page 61).

SPEAKER SETUP

Speaker placement

More than 30 cm (12 in)

60˚

30˚

SBR

SBL

80˚

1.8 m (6 ft)

Note

SPEAKER SETUP

■ Di-pole speaker layout

Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used

for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please

place the surround and surround back speakers according

to the speaker layout below.

SBR

SBL

30˚ 30˚

: Di-pole speaker

: Direction of di-pole speaker

SPEAKER SETUP

PREPARATION

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),

“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the

polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

• If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set

this unit’s speaker impedance setting to

6 ohms before using (see page 26). If you will

use 8 ohm speakers, use this unit’s initial

setting for speaker impedance.

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this

unit is disconnected from the power source.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or

do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This

could damage this unit and/or speakers.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of

speaker still creates interference with the monitor,

place the speakers away from the monitor.

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped

differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.

Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)

terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain

cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8 in) of

insulation from each of the speaker cables.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together

to prevent short circuits.

3 Loosen the knob.

The supplied speaker terminal wrench is useful for

loosening or tightening knobs.

4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

■ Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or

PRESENCE speaker terminals

1 Open the tab.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each

terminal.

3 Return the tab to secure the wire.

■ Banana plug connections

(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)

First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug

connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.

You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and

PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one

banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not

attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs.

Speaker connections

CAUTION

10 mm (3/8 in)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Speaker terminal wrench

Banana plug

(With the exception of U.K., Europe

and Asia models)

SPEAKER SETUP

SPEAKERS

FRONT

SURROUND

FRONT

CENTER

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE

SURROUND

CLASS 2 WIRING

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

SURROUND BACK SINGLE

CENTER

SINGLE

(SB)

–

––

–

PRESENCE/ZONE 2

2 31

7 8 65 109

Center

speaker

Front speakers (A)

Surround back speakers

LeftRight

LeftRight LeftRight

Surround speakers

Front

speakers

(B)

Speaker layout

(U.S.A. model)

LeftRight

Presence speakers

• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.You can set

to prioritize either set of speakers in the Sound menu (see page 61).

• The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only

operate when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES or Dolby Pro Logic x decoder is turned on.

• The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields

are selected.

Subwoofer with

built-in amplifier

SPEAKER SETUP

PREPARATION

■ FRONT terminals

Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals.

If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of

the FRONT A or B terminals.

The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems

simultaneously.

Bi-wired connection

The unit also allows you to make bi-wired connections to

one speaker system. Use two pairs of speaker cables for

each speaker (one pair for the woofer and one pair for the

tweeter/mid-range). To use the bi-wired connections, press

SPEAKERS A and SPEAKERS B on the front panel so

that both SP A and B light up on the front panel display.

■ CENTER terminals

Connect a center speaker to these terminals.

■ SURROUND terminals

Connect surround speakers to these terminals.

■ SUBWOOFER jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

■ SURROUND BACK terminals

Connect surround back speakers to these terminals.

If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it

to the left (L) terminals.

■ PRESENCE terminals

Connect presence speakers to these terminals.

You can also use these terminals to connect Zone 2 speakers

(see page 83).

Note

Bi-wired connection

FRONT

–

This unit

CONNECTIONS

Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains

power until all connections between components are

complete.

■ Cable indications

■ Analog jacks

You can input analog signals from audio components by

connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this

unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs

to the left jacks.

■ Digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital

signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You

can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both

the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to

signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks

are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.

This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus

audio signals input at the analog jacks are only output at the

analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input at the

digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output at the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

■ Video jacks

This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.

The signals input at the S VIDEO jacks on this unit are

automatically converted for output at the VIDEO jacks.

When

“Video Conv.” is set to “On” (see page 66), signals

input at the VIDEO jacks can be output at the S VIDEO

and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Likewise, signals input

at the S VIDEO jacks can also be output at the

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

VIDEO jack

For conventional composite video signals.

S VIDEO jack

For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color

reproduction.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color difference (P

B, PR) to provide the best quality in

picture reproduction.

When signals are input at both the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks,

signals input at the S VIDEO jack have priority.

CONNECTIONS

Before connecting components

Note

CAUTION

left analog cables

right analog cables

optical cables

coaxial cables

video cables

S-video cables

For analog signals

For digital signals

For video signals

Note

VIDEO

S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Signal flow inside this unit

Only when “Video Conv.” is set to “On”

(see page 66)

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Input

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connections for DVD playback

Connecting video components

MONITOR

OUT

AUDIOVIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

VIDEO

OUTPUT

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

DVD

COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

PBY

DVD

DVD player

Video

monitor

(U.S.A. model)

Optical out Video out

Audio out

Video in

Coaxial out

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or

pre-amplifier.

If you set Multi CH Assign: Input Channels to 8ch (see page 57), you can use input jacks assigned as Multi CH Assign:

Front Input (page 57) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8 channels.

Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to

match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.

• When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you

cannot select sound field programs.

• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that

you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.

• When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output.

Notes

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

SURROUND

AUDIO

DVD

DTV

CBL/

SAT

OUT

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

AUDIO

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

LRLR

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

SURROUND

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

Multi-format player/

External decoder

Multi-format player/

External decoder

For 6-channel input For 8-channel input

Front

out

Surround

out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

Front out

Surround out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

Surround

back out

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connections for other video components

■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a

game console or video camera, to this unit.

AUDIOVIDEO

S VIDEO

CBL/

SAT

VIDEO

OUT

VCR 1

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

CBL/SAT

COAXIAL

DVR/VCR 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

PRPBY

DTV

CBL/

SAT

LR LR

Cable TV or

satellite tuner

(U.S.A. model)

DVD recorder

or VCR

Audio out

Video out

Optical out

Audio out

Video out

Video in

Audio in

Coaxial out

S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

Game

console or

video camera

Video out

S-video out

Audio out L

Audio out R

Optical out

CONNECTIONS

■ Connections for audio components

■ Connecting a turntable

PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM

or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with

a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting

transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to

these jacks.

Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in

the signal. However you may hear less noise without the

connection to the GND terminal for some record players.

Connecting audio components

GND

AUDIO

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

PHONO

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

MD/TAPE

CD-R

COAXIAL

LRLRLR LR

LRLR

CD player

MD recorder or

tape deck

(U.S.A. model)

CD recorder

Turntable

Optical out

Coaxial out

Audio in

Optical in

Audio inAudio out

Audio out

GND

Audio out

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connecting to an external amplifier

If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,

or want to use another amplifier, connect an external

amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.

• When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for

output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the

external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.

• The signal output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE

OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings.

• If SPEAKERS A is turned off and Multi Zone: Speaker B is set

to “Zone B” (see page 67), signals will only be output at the

FRONT PRE OUT jacks.

1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks

Front channel line output jacks.

2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Surround channel line output jacks.

3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT

jacks

Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. If

you only connect one external amplifier for the surround

back channel, connect it to the left (L) jack.

5 CENTER PRE OUT jack

Center channel line output jack.

• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the

corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround

back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals

output at SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks

may not correspond to the correct speakers.

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer.

• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE

OUT jack depending on the Speaker Set settings (see page 62).

■ Connecting i.LINK components

If you have a component with an i.LINK connector, you

can enjoy digital audio from CD, DVD, Super Audio CD

and DVD-A discs.

For details on i.LINK, see “USING i.LINK” on page 91.

An i.LINK cable shorter than 3.5 m is recommended.

■ Connecting HDMI components

This unit has the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks for

signal input as well as the HDMI OUT jack for signal

output. Connect the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this

unit to the HDMI OUT jack of other HDMI-compatible

components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI

OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN jack of other

HDMI-compatible components (such as TV and a

projector).

For details on HDMI, see “USING HDMI” on page 95.

An HDMI cable shorter than 5 m with the HDMI logo printed on

it is recommended.

Notes

FRONT

SURROUND

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE

CENTER

SINGLE

(SB)

Note

DIGITAL OUTPUT

OPTICAL

(AUDIO)

S400

i.LINK component

DIGITAL INPUT

CBL/SAT

COAXIAL

DVR/VCR 2

HDMI

IN 1

IN 2

OUT

DVD Player

Video monitor

HDMI OUT

DVD Player

HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

CONNECTIONS

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the

designated terminals.

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Set up the AM loop antenna.

2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop

antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND

terminals.

3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best

reception.

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an

outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest

authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor

antennas.

■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter

(U.K. model only)

1 Open the cover of the

included 75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter.

2 Cut the external sleeve

of the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and prepare it for

connection.

3 Cut the lead wire and

remove it.

4 Insert the cable

wire into the slot,

and clamp it with

pliers.

5 Snap the cover into place.

Connecting the antennas

TUNER

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

ANT

AM loop antenna

(included)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum interference,

connect the antenna

GND terminal to a good earth

ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven

into moist earth.

Indoor FM antenna

(included)

(U.S.A. model)

Notes

11 (7/16)

8 (5/16)

6 (1/14)

Unit:

mm (in)

Lead wire

Clamp

Insert the wire

into the slot

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connecting the AC power cable

Plug the power cable into the AC inlet after all other

connections are complete, then plug the power cable to an

AC wall outlet.

Do not use other AC power cables. Use the provided

cable. Use of other power cables may result in fire hazard

or electrical shock.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.K. and Australia models ..................................... 1 outlet

Korea model ............................................................... None

Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets

Use these outlets to connect the power cables from your

other components to this unit. Power to the AC

OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON

(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets

will supply power to any connected component whenever

this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power

consumption of components) that can be connected to the

AC OUTLET(S) is:

Asia and General models .......................................... 50 W

Other models ...........................................................100 W

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC main supply. Voltages are:

General model .......AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

Asia model ...........................AC 220/230–240V, 50/60 Hz

■ Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from

being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However if the power cable is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost.

Connecting the power cable

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

AC IN

(U.S.A. model)

SELECTO

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models)

CAUTION

CONNECTIONS

Follow the procedure below to change the impedance

setting for all speakers.

If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to

6 ohms before using this unit.

Be sure this unit is in the standby mode.

1 On the front panel, while holding down

STRAIGHT/EFFECT, press STANDBY/ON.

“SP IMP.–8ΩMIN” appears on the front panel

display.

2 Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to select the

impedance of your speakers.

If you are using 6 ohm speakers, select 6 ohms; if you

are using 8 ohm speakers, select 8 ohms.

3 Press STANDBY/ON to exit the setting.

This unit will be set to the standby mode.

Speaker impedance setting function is located in the Advanced

menu (see page 86).

When all connections are complete, turn on the power of

this unit.

1 Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on

the remote controls) to turn on the power of

this unit.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

Press STANDBY/ON again (or STANDBY on the remote

control) to enter the standby mode.

Speaker impedance setting

CAUTION

Note

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

STANDBY

/ON

SP IMP.-8 MIN

Turning on the power

Note

SPEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

MAIN ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/

TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

STANDBY

/ON

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR 2

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

AMP

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

Front panel

Remote control

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room

Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you

avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and

achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied

optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound

your speakers produce in your actual listening

environment.

• Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be

output during the auto setup procedure.

• If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen,

follow the troubleshooting on page 31.

YPAO performs the following checks and makes

appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible

sound from your system.

Wiring

Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of

each speaker.

Distance

Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening

position and adjusts the timing of each channel.

Size

Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the

appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel.

Equalizing

Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric

equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and

create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly

important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers

for some channels or have a room with unique sonic

characteristics.

YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three

parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the

seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly

precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics.

Level

Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each

speaker.

1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

• After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to

disconnect the optimizer microphone.

• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat.

– Keep it away from direct sunlight.

– Do not place it on top of this unit.

2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat

level surface with the omni-directional

microphone head upward, at your normal

listening position.

If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer

mic at the same height as your ears would be when

you are seated in your listening position.

AUTO SETUP

Introduction

Notes

Optimizer microphone setup

Notes

SPEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

MAIN ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/

TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

PROGRAM

MD/TAPEDV D

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR 2

Optimizer microphone position

AUTO SETUP

For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible

during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too

much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory.

If your subwoofer has adjustable volume and crossover/high cut

frequency controls, set the volume between 9 and 11 o’clock (as

viewed on a conventional clockface) and set the crossover/high

cut frequency to the maximum.

1 Switch on this unit and video monitor.

2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

TOP on the remote control.

The top display appears.

3 Press k / n repeatedly to select Auto Setup,

then press h.

4 Press k / n repeatedly to select Setup Menu,

then press h.

5 Press k / n repeatedly to select Wiring,

Distance, Size, Equalizing or Level, then

press h.

Equalizing is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 87).

6 For Wiring, Distance, Size or Level, select:

Check To automatically check and adjust the selected

item.

Skip To skip the selected item and perform no

adjustments.

When using THX speakers, select “Skip” for Size and make

sure that “Small” or “Small x2” is selected in Speaker Set

(page 62) and that “80Hz” is selected in Bass Cross Over

(page 63).

Starting the setup

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN

MAX

Subwoofer

VOLUME

MIN

MAX

TOP

TITLE

Sound

Option

Basic

Manual Setup

Auto Setup

System Memory

Input Select

Stereo/Surround

AMP

SOURCE

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET

Information

Setup Type

Start

Setup Menu

Auto Setup

System Memory

Audio Info.

Manual Setup

Input Select

Setup Menu

Setup Type

Start

Wiring

Distance

Size

Information

Skip

Check

Wiring

Distance

Size

Skip

Check

Size

Equalizing

Level

Distance

Wiring

Skip

Check

Distance

Size

Equalizing

Wiring

Skip

Check: Natural

Check: Flat

Check: Front

Equalizing

Level

Size

Distance

Skip

Check

Level

Equalizing

Size

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

For Equalizing, press k / n to select:

Skip To skip the selected item and perform no

adjustments.

Check: Natural To average out the frequency response of all

speakers with higher frequencies being less

emphasized. Recommended if the “Flat”

setting sounds a little harsh.

Check: Flat To average the frequency response of all

speakers. Recommended if all of your

speakers are of similar quality.

Check: Front To adjust the frequency response of each

speaker in accordance with the sound of

your front speakers. Recommended if your

front speakers are of much higher quality

than your other speakers.

7 Once you have selected the desired setting,

press l to move back to Setup Menu.

8 Press n to select Setup Type, then select:

Auto To automatically perform the entire

auto setup procedure.

Step To pause for confirmation between

each check in the auto setup procedure.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display

system options menu (see page 87).

9 Press n to select Start, then press ENTER.

Loud test tones are output from each speaker and

“Measuring” appears during the auto setup

procedure.

• To stop the auto setup procedure, press one of the cursor

buttons (

k / n / l / h) or ENTER. In the pause mode,

press k to retry the procedure,

l to cancel auto setup.

• If an error message appears during testing, refer to

“Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on

page 31, and after carrying out the remedy, retry the auto

setup procedure.

• This menu item is also available in the front panel display

system options menu (see page 87).

Setup Menu

Setup Type

Start

Wiring

Distance

Size

Information

Setup Type

Start

Auto

Step

Setup Menu

Information

Start:ENTERStart

Setup Type

Setup Menu

AUTO SETUP

You can confirm the results of each analysis.

If you set Setup Type to “Auto”

The results are displayed after all items have been

analyzed.

•Press n and select Setup to set the measured values.

•Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure.

•Press h and select Detail to view information about

measurement results and warning messages. For more

details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for

the auto setup procedure” on page 31.

•Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup

procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on

the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes.

To cancel the settings and exit, select No.

If you set Setup Type to “Step”

The results are displayed individually after each analysis.

• Press n and select Next to start measurement of the next

menu item.

• Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure.

• Press h and select Detail to view information about

measurement results and warning messages. For more

details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for

the auto setup procedure” on page 31.

• Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup

procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on

the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes.

To cancel the settings and exit, select No.

After all menu items have been measured, “Measurement

Over” appears on the screen and the results for each item

are displayed.

• Press n and select Setup to set the measured values.

• Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure.

• Press h and select Detail to view information about

measurement results and warning messages. For more

details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for

the auto setup procedure” on page 31.

• Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup

procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on

the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes.

To cancel the settings and exit, select No.

If you want to make more detailed settings, change the system

parameters using the Manual Setup menu. If you want to return to

the Auto Setup settings after making settings in the Manual Setup

menu, navigate to the Information screen in the Auto Setup menu,

press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust,

then press ENTER.

• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your

listening environment, perform auto setup again to re-calibrate

your system.

• Depending on your listening environment, SubWfr:REV may

appear in the Wiring results. In this case, SWFR Phase in the

Manual Setup menu (see page 64) is automatically set to

Reverse. To select the desired setting, change the SWFR Phase

parameter in the Manual Setup menu.

• In the Distance results, the distance displayed may be longer

than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your

subwoofer. This may also be the case when using an external

amplifier.

• In the Equalizing results, different values may be set for the

same band to provide finer adjustments.

Confirming the results

Measurement Over

Successfully

Start

Setup Type

Setup Menu

Retry

Setup

Exit Detail

Notes

Equalizing

Size

Distance

Level

Result

Retry

Exit Detail

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

■ Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure

Before auto setup

During auto setup

Press l / h to display detailed information for individual errors. Select Retry to try the auto setup procedure again.

Error message Cause Remedy

Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

Unplug Phones! Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones.

No Setup Menu! No setup menu items have been selected. • Select at least one setup menu item.

Memory Guard! This setting is protected. • Remove the protection setting for auto setup

(see page 68).

Error message Cause Remedy

E01:No Front SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not

detected.

• Select the front speakers by pressing

SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel

(or by setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP,

then pressing SPEAKERS A or B on the remote

control).

• Check the front L/R speaker connections.

E02:No Sur. SP Only one surround channel signal is detected. • Check the surround speaker connections.

E03:No Pres. SP Only one presence channel signal is detected. • Check the presence speaker connections.

E04:SBR ->SBL Only the surround back right channel signal is

detected.

• Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT

SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you

only have one surround back speaker.

E05:Noisy Background noise is too loud. • Try auto setup in a quiet environment.

• Turn off noisy electric equipment like air

conditioners, or move them away from this unit.

E06:Check Sur. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected,

though surround L/R speakers are not.

• Connect surround speakers when using (a) surround

back speaker(s).

E07:No MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged

during the auto setup procedure.

• Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

E08:No Signal The optimizer microphone does not detect test

tones.

• Check the microphone setting.

• Check the speaker connections and placement.

E09:User Cancel The auto setup procedure was cancelled

because a setting that affects auto setup (such as

changing speaker settings, etc.) was changed

during the procedure.

• Perform the auto setup procedure again.

E10:Internal Err An internal error occurred. • Restart this unit, then try the auto setup procedure

again.

AUTO SETUP

After auto setup

The following warning messages are displayed after analysis is complete to inform you of possible problems. We

recommend that you check the contents of each message, then select Retry to try the auto setup procedure again.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W1:Out of Phase Speaker polarity is incorrect. This message may

appear depending on the speakers even when

they are connected correctly.

• Check the speaker connections.

W2:Over Distance The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).

• Bring the speaker closer to the listening position.

W3:Level Error The difference in volume level between the

speakers is excessive. (No level correction is

made.)

• Readjust the speaker installation.

• Check the speaker connections.

• Use speakers of similar quality.

• Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.

W4:SP Mismatch The speaker settings differ from the

measurement results of wiring (only occurs

when the wiring measurement procedure is

skipped).

• Check the speaker connections.

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

1 Press STANDBY/ON (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV

to AMP, then press SYSTEM POWER on the

remote control) to turn on the power.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel

(or press SPEAKERS A or B on the remote

control).

Each press turns the respective speakers on or off.

When bi-wiring, select both A and B.

4 Select the input source.

Use the INPUT selector (or press one of the input

selector buttons on the remote control) to select the

input you desire.

The current input source name appears in the front

panel display and video monitor for a few seconds.

5 Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operation instructions for the component.

See page 41 for details about tuning instructions.

6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.

PLAYBACK

Basic operations

SPEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

MAIN ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/

TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

STANDBY

/ON

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR 2

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

EXIT

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERSMEMORY

PRESET

EXIT

PURE DIRECT

TOP

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOL

–

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

Front panel

Remote control

AMP

SOURCE

SPEAKERS

+10

ENT.

SPEAKERS

Front panel Remote control

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

INPUT

Front panel Remote control

VOLUME

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

DVD

VCR 1

Selected input source

VOLUME

VOL

–

Remote control

Front panel

PLAYBACK

7 Select a sound field program if desired.

Use PROGRAM (or press one of the sound field

program buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field

program. See page 48 for details about sound field

programs.

When this unit detects Dolby Digital signals, the following

display appears for a few seconds. This shows how the signal

level is being corrected to become –27 dB (THX

recommendation).3

■ Front panel operation

Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program.

The name of the selected program appears in the front

panel display and video monitor.

Note

PROGRAM

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

SPEAKERSMEMORY

Remote control

Front panel

DialNorm;;+4dB

Selecting sound field programs

SPEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

MAIN ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/

TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

STANDBY

/ON

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR 2

PROGRAM

VOLUME

HiFi DSP

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

Hall in Munich

Program name

PROGRAM

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Remote control operation

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press one of

the sound field program buttons repeatedly to

select the desired program.

The name of the selected program appears in the front

panel display and video monitor.

Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference,

and not on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with that source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the

MULTI CH INPUT is selected.

■ To adjust the tone

You can adjust the bass/treble

balance for the front left/right and

center channels.

Press TONE CONTROL

repeatedly on the front panel to

select TREBLE or BASS.

Select TREBLE, then rotate

PROGRAM to the right or left to

increase or decrease the high-

frequency response.

Select BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to

increase or decrease the low-frequency response.

To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL

repeatedly to select BYPASS.

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the

low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of

the surround speakers may not match that of the front left/right

and center speakers.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (page 48) or

PURE DIRECT (page 38) is selected, or when

MULTI CH INPUT is selected.

• If headphones are connected to this unit, the Tone Control

setting adjusts the bass/treble balance of your headphones

(see page 60).

■ To mute the sound

Press MUTE on the remote control.

The MUTE indicator flashes on the

front panel display.

To resume the audio output, press

MUTE again (or press VOL –/+).

The MUTE indicator disappears from

the display.

You can adjust the muting level (see page 60).

Notes

EXIT

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

SPEAKERSMEMORY

PRESET

Sound field

program buttons

AMP/SOURCE/TV

VOLUME

HiFi DSP

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

Hall in Munich

AMP

SOURCE

Program name

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

SPEAKERSMEMORY

Additional operations

Notes

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

MUTE

PLAYBACK

■ To listen with headphones

(“SILENT CINEMA”)

“SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS

surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT

CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect

headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to

CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When

activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in

the front panel display.

• This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when

MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

•

“SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or a

2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode.

■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT

Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT”

appears in the front panel display and video monitor.

When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display

and/or the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select

another input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or one of the input selector buttons on the remote control), press

MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” from the

front panel display and the video monitor.

■ Enjoying multi-channel software in

6.1/7.1 channel surround

If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use

this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for

multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic x,

Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press EXTD

SUR. on the remote control to switch between 5.1

and 6.1/7.1 channel playback.

To select a decoder, press l / h repeatedly

when PL xMovie (etc.) is displayed.

Auto (AUTO)

When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is

input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing

back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.

If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in

the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in

6.1/7.1 channels.

Decoders (select with l / h)

You can select from the following modes depending on

the format of the software you are playing.

PL xMovie

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1

channels using the Pro Logic x movie decoder.

PL xMusic

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Pro Logic x music decoder.

EX/ES

For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels

using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.

DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the

DTS-ES decoder.

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.

Off (OFF)

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1

channels.

When Surround Back is set to “Large x1” or “Small x1”

(see page 63), the surround back channel will output from the left

SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.

Notes

Note

MULTI CH

INPUT

MULTI CH IN

Front panel Remote control

EXTD SUR.

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)

which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these

kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select decoders (PL xMovie,

PL xMusic, EX/ES or EX) manually.

• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD SUR. is

pressed in the following cases:

– When Surround or Surround Back is set to “None”

(see page 63).

– When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is

being played.

– When the source being played does not contain surround L/R

channel signals.

– When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– When 2ch Stereo, 7ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected.

• When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be

reset to AUTO.

• The Pro Logic x decoder is not available when Surround Back

is set to “None” (see page 63).

• “PL xMovie” cannot be selected when Surround Back is set to

“Large x1” or “Small x1” (see page 63).

■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround

Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played

back on multiple channels.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

STANDARD on the remote control to switch

between the SUR. STANDARD and SUR.

ENHANCED programs.

Or press MOVIE or THX on the remote control to

select the MOVIE THEATER or THX programs.

Press SELECT on the remote control to select

the decoder.

You can select from the following modes depending on

the type of software you are playing and your personal

preference.

When you select the SUR. STANDARD program

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software.

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software.

<Neo:6 Cinema>

DTS processing for movie software.

<Neo:6 Music>

DTS processing for music software.

<CS Cinema>*

SRS Circle Surround processing for movie software.

<CS Music>*

SRS Circle Surround processing for music software.

* (U.S.A. model only)

When you select the SUR. ENHANCED, MOVIE

THEATER or THX programs

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.

<Neo:6 Cinema>

DTS processing for movie software.

• You can also select a decoder with the Decode Type parameter

in the Stereo/Surround menu (see page 99).

• You can also select a decoder by pressing l / h on the remote

control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message

display.

The Pro Logic x decoder is not available when Surround Back is

set to “None” (see page 63).

Notes

STANDARD

MOVIE

THX

SELECT

Note

PLAYBACK

■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound

(PURE DIRECT)

PURE DIRECT bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP

processors as well as shuts down the video circuitry,

allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound fidelity

from analog and PCM sources.

Press PURE DIRECT to activate pure direct.

The button lights up and the front panel display

automatically goes out

The front panel display switches on momentarily when an

operation is performed.

To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again.

The indicator around the front panel button goes out and

the previous settings are restored.

• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in

this mode.

• When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input,

this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog

input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will

be heard.)

• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.

• Tone Control (page 35) and GUI menu (page 52) settings are

not effective.

• The following operations are not possible during PURE

DIRECT operation:

– switching the sound field program

– displaying the short message

– adjusting GUI menu parameters

– all video functions (video conversion etc.)

• PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is

set to the standby mode.

■ Night listening modes

The night listening modes are designed to improve

listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either

NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the

type of material you are playing.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press NIGHT

on the remote control repeatedly to select

cinema or music.

When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in

the front panel display lights up.

• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources

to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select NIGHT:OFF if you do not want to use this

function.

Press l / h to adjust the effect level while

NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.

This adjusts the level of compression.

• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.

• Select “MID” for standard compression.

• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.

NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored

independently.

• You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT,

MULTI CH INPUT, or when headphones are connected

(even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE

DIRECT is selected).

• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending

on the input source and surround sound settings you use.

Notes

PURE DIRECT

Front panel Remote control

Notes

Remote control

NIGHT

AUDIO

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET

Remote control

Effect.Lvl:MID

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Downmixing to 2 channels

You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multi-

channel sources.

Rotate PROGRAM (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to

AMP, then press STEREO on the remote control)

to select 2ch Stereo.

You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or

BOTH is selected in LFE/BASS OUT.

■ Listening to unprocessed input signals

In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are

output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-

channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate

channels without any additional effect processing.

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select STRAIGHT.

Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT again so that “STRAIGHT”

disappears from the display when you want to turn the

sound effect back on.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates

virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field.

If you set Surround to None, Virtual CINEMA DSP

activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA

DSP sound field program.

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when Surround is

set to “None” (see page 62) in the following cases:

– When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

– When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

■ Playing video sources in the

background

You can combine images from a video source with sound

from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery

from the video source on the video monitor.

Use the input selector buttons to select a video

source, then select an audio source.

If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select

the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT.

Note

2ch Stereo

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

SPEAKERSMEMORY

Front panel

PROGRAM

Remote control

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

Front panel Remote control

Note

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

Audio sources

Video sources

PLAYBACK

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can

select the type of input signal you want to use as follows.

Press AUDIO SELECT to select an input mode.

In most cases, use AUTO.

AUTO Automatically selects input signals in

the following order:

1) i.LINK

2) HDMI

3) Digital signals

4) Analog signals

i.LINK Selects only i.LINK signals.

If no i.LINK signals are input, no

sound is output.

HDMI Selects only HDMI signals.

If no HDMI signals are input, no sound

is output.

COAX/OPT Selects digital signals input at the

OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks.

Use if i.LINK or HDMI signals are also

being input.

ANALOG Selects only analog signals.

If no analog signals are input, no sound

is output.

* If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal,

the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate

sound field program.

• You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the

power is turned on (see page 56).

• DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD

encoded in DTS.

If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any

way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you

make a digital connection between this unit and the player.

■ Displaying information about the input

source

You can display the type, format and sampling frequency

of the current input signal.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

TOP on the remote control.

The top display appears.

2 Press n repeatedly to select Audio Info.

The following information appears in the display.

Format Signal format display. When the unit

cannot detect a digital signal it

automatically switches to analog input.

Sampling Sampling frequency. When the unit is

unable to detect the sampling

frequency “?” appears.

Channel Number of source channels in the input

signal. For example, a multi-channel

soundtrack with 3 front channels,

2 surround channels and LFE, is

displayed as “3/2/0.1”.

Bitrate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to

detect the bit rate “– – –” appears.

Dialogue Dialogue normalization information

for Dolby Digital signals.

Flag1/Flag2 Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby

Digital signals that cue this unit to

automatically switch decoders.

3 Press EXIT.

Selecting audio input modes

Note

AUDIO

SELECT

A.SEL: AUTO

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

VOLUME

LL R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

Front panel Remote control

Input mode

TOP

TITLE

Sound

Option

Basic

Manual Setup

Auto Setup

System Memory

Input Select

Stereo/Surround

AMP

SOURCE

Sampling

Bitrate

Channel

Format

Flag1

Flag2

Dialogue

---

2/0/---

Analog

---

Auto Setup

Audio Info.

System Memory

TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

■ Automatic tuning

1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select TUNER

as the input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that

the AUTO indicator lights up on the front

panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this

unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible.

Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin

automatic tuning.

Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l

to tune into a lower frequency.

When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator

lights up and the frequency of the received station is

shown on the front panel display.

■ Manual tuning

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,

you must tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an

FM station will automatically change the reception mode

to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.

1 Select TUNER and the reception band

following steps 1 and 2 as described in

“Automatic tuning”.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that

the AUTO indicator disappears from the front

panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this

unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible.

Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into

the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to

continue searching.

TUNING

Automatic and manual tuning

SPEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

MAIN ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/

TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

STANDBY

/ON

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR 2

332

INPUT

Front panel

FM/AM

AUTO/MAN'L

TUNING

MODE

AUTO

Lights up

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

AUTO

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD T

A AM 630 kHz

PRESET/

TUNING

TUNED

AUTO

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD T

A AM 1530 kHz

HiFi DSP

AUTO/MAN'L

TUNING

MODE

AUTO

Disappears

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

AUTO

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD T

A AM 630 kHz

PRESET/

TUNING

■ Automatically presetting FM stations

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables this unit to

automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals,

and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through

E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any

preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that

the AUTO indicator lights up on the front

panel display.

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for more than 3 seconds.

The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO

indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic

presetting starts from the frequency currently

displayed and proceeds toward the higher

frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after

searching all stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually

and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting

stations”.

Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which this unit will

store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies.

After pressing MEMORY in step 3:

1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to

select the preset number under which the first station

will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when

stations have all been stored up to E8.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon

(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin

tuning toward lower frequencies.

Presetting stations

SPEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

MAIN ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/

TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

STANDBY

/ON

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR 2

321

FM/AM

AUTO/MAN'L

TUNING

MODE

AUTO

Lights up

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

VOLUME

MEMORY

AUTO

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

A1:FM 87.5 MHz

Notes

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the preset stations may be cleared.

If so, store the stations again by using the presetting

station methods.

TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Manually presetting stations

You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations

in 5 groups, A1 through E8) manually.

1 Tune into a station.

See page 41 for tuning instructions.

When tuned into a station, the front panel display

shows the frequency of the station received.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A to E) while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)

appears on the front panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

Press h to select a higher preset station number.

Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The station band and

frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset

group and number you have

selected.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

SPEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

MAIN ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/

TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

STANDBY

/ON

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR 2

3 2,5

VOLUME

TUNED

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

A :AM 630 kHz

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

Flashes

A/B/C/D/E

VOLUME

MEMORY

TUNED

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

C :AM 630 kHz

Preset group

Notes

PRESET/

TUNING

VOLUME

MEMORY

TUNED

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

C3:AM 630 kHz

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

VOLUME

TUNED

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

C3:AM 630 kHz

Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.

TUNING

You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number under which it was stored.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE, then press

TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode.

2 Press A/B/C/D/E (or l / h on the remote

control) to select the preset station group.

The preset group letter appears on the front panel

display and changes each time you press the button.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or

PRESET k / n on the remote control) to

select a preset station number (1 through 8).

The preset group and number appear on the front

panel display along with the station band, frequency

and the TUNED indicator lights up.

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” by using

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

See “Selecting preset stations”.

2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

more than 3 seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

3 Select preset station “A5” by using

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

Selecting preset stations

SPEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

MAIN ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/

TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

STANDBY

/ON

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR 2

EXIT

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

PRESET

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DV D

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

A/B/C/D/E

Front panel

Remote control

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET

PRESET/

TUNING

Front panel

Remote control

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET

TUNED

VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

Exchanging preset stations

SPEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

MAIN ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/

TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

STANDBY

/ON

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR 2

1,3

2,4

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

TUNED

VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

VOLUME

MEMORY

TUNED

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

A5:FM 90.6 MHz

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

EDIT E1-A5

TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

HD Radio is a new technology that enables AM and FM

radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital

broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved

audio quality and reception as well as new data services.

Furthermore, supplemental program services allow

listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs

multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further

information on HD Radio, visit “www.ibiquity.com”.

This unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature,

facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog

FM stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, this unit

can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist

names, album names, and genres) from supplemental

program services (HD1 to HD8).

Just as for tuning into an analog FM or AM station,

2 tuning methods are available: automatic and manual.

This unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital HD

Radio station signals. However, this unit may not automatically

receive all-digital FM station signals and the automatic tuning

operation may stop. In this case, select one of the preset stations,

or manually tune into the FM station you want to select, then set

the tuning mode back to AUTO by pressing TUNING MODE

(AUTO/MAN’L).

■ HD Radio automatic tuning

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

Follow steps 1 through 4 as described in

“Automatic tuning” on page 41.

Both analog and digital broadcasts are received, but when

tuned into an HD Radio station, the TUNED and HD

indicators light up and the frequency of the received

station is displayed in the front panel.

If the HD indicator lights up, the broadcast being received

contains an HD Radio digital signal.

■ HD Radio manual tuning

Manual tuning is recommended when station signals are

weak.

Follow steps 1 through 3 as described in

“Manual tuning” on page 41, then set the tuning

mode back to AUTO by pressing TUNING MODE

(AUTO/MAN’L).

Both analog and digital broadcasts are received, but when

tuned into an HD Radio station, the TUNED and HD

indicators light up and the frequency of the received

station is displayed in the front panel.

If station signals are weak, analog broadcasts will be played back

instead even in the automatic tuning mode, and the HD indicator

does not light up.

Using HD Radio

™

HD Radio

™

tuning

CAUTION

Note

TUNING

Use this feature to select one of the 8 HD Radio audio

programs (HD1 to HD8) when the unit is in the tuner

mode. Each audio program contains data programs.

Press PRG SELECT on the remote control

repeatedly to toggle between HD Radio audio

programs.

Press PRG SELECT again within 2 seconds to select

another data program.

The HD indicator may disappear from the front panel

display while toggling between data programs.

• Only 1 HD Radio audio program (HD1) is available for AM

broadcasts, while up to 8 audio programs (HD1 to HD8) are

available for FM broadcasts.

• When reception for an audio program ceases, the HD

indicator

disappears from the front panel display and HD1 is

automatically selected after approximately 20 seconds.

• Some audio programs may not contain data programs

depending on the broadcasting station and the time period.

• The audio programs from HD2 to HD8 can be selected only

when they contain data programs.

There are 3 types of front panel displays that show HD

Radio information when the unit is in the tuner mode:

frequency, station and music information.

Press DISPLAY on the remote control repeatedly

to toggle between the following 3 front panel

displays.

■ Frequency information

(Preset group / FM or AM / Frequency)

■ Station information

(Station name / FM or AM / Audio program)

Station information is available when a station name is

received as data in 4 alphabetical codes.

■ Music information

(Song title / Artist name / Album name / Genre)

Music information is available only when data programs

are received.

If the music information is long, it automatically scrolls to

the left in the front panel display.

HD Radio information is also available in the GUI menu

(see page 55).

Selecting HD Radio

™

audio programs

Notes

Displaying HD Radio

™

information

VOLUME

TUNED

AUTO HD

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

A FM 87.5 MHz

HiFi DSP

VOLUME

TUNED

AUTO

STEREO

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

WXYZ-FM : HD1

HiFi DSP

Station name

Audio program

VOLUME

TUNED

AUTO HD

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

FM Radio - CD

HiFi DSP

RECORDING

BASIC

OPERATION

You can use the REC OUT/ZONE 2 control to record one

source while watching and/or listening to another source.

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operation instructions for those components.

1 Turn on the power of this unit and all

connected components.

2 Select the source component you want to

record from by using REC OUT/ZONE 2.

• To record the current input source that you are

watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 to

SOURCE/REMOTE.

• To record a source other than the one that you are

watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 to

the source you want to record.

After this setting, you can change the source you

are listening to and/or watching without effecting

the recording by rotating the INPUT selector (or

pressing one of the input selector buttons on the

remote control).

3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

• To record audio and video from different sources, set REC

OUT/ZONE 2 to SOURCE/REMOTE, select a video source

first then select an audio source (see page 39).

• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• The source you record and the source sent to Zone 2 are always

the same.

• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between other components connected to this unit.

• The setting of TONE CONTROL, (see page 60) VOLUME,

Speaker Level (page 65) and programs does not affect recorded

material.

• A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit

cannot be recorded.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or

dubbing video signals, if your video source component is

connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite

video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a

composite video) signal to your VCR.

• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not

output at the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording.

Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are

not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your

source component is connected to provide only digital (or

analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals.

• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not

output on VCR 1 OUT.)

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may

infringe copyright laws.

• Audio signals input from the selected i.LINK or HDMI

components are output to REC OUT when REC OUT/ZONE 2

on the front panel is set to SOURCE/REMOTE or to the source

you want to record. However, multi-channel DVD audio

signals, DSD signals of Super Audio CD and 2-channel PCM

signals over 48 kHz of sampling frequency cannot be output to

REC OUT.

■ Special considerations when recording

DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player

is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation

instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will

be output from the player.

RECORDING

SPEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

MAIN ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/

TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

STANDBY

/ON

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR 2

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR 2

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR 2

Notes

If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field

processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous

concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.

The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to

AUTO (see page 40) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.

• This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in

actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.

• Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.

You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”

can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel

(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.

Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to

select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on pages 34 and 35.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

Notes

For movie/video sources

Sources

Remote

control

button

Program Features

MULTI

2-CH

STEREO

2ch Stereo

Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back

2-channel sources as is.

ENTERTAINMENT

TV Sports

CINEMA DSP processing. Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow,

the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall.

This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as

news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.

ENTERTAINMENT

Mono Movie

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is provided for reproducing monaural

video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum

reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field.

ENTERTAINMENT

Game

CINEMA DSP processing. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video

game sounds.

MOVIE THEATER

Spectacle

CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field

of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail,

making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any

kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS

(especially large-scale movie productions).

MOVIE THEATER

Sci-Fi

CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound

effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad

and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films

in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and

DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques.

MOVIE THEATER

Adventure

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the

sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The

sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the

reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible.

MOVIE THEATER

General

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm

and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive

sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all

around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations

without losing clarity.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

MULTI

2-CH

THX

THX Cinema

THX processing for movie software.

THX

THX Game

THX processing for game software.

THX

THX Select2 Cinema

THX Select2 processing for movie software.

MULTI

THX

THX Surr. EX

THX processing for any 5.1 channel source.

SUR. STANDARD

DOLBY DIGITAL

Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

SUR. STANDARD

q D+PL x Movie

Standard 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

SUR. STANDARD

DOLBY D EX

Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

SUR. STANDARD

DTS

Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS sources.

SUR. STANDARD

DTS 96/24

Standard 5.1 channel processing for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

SUR. STANDARD

DTS+PL x Movie

Standard 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic x) for DTS sources.

SUR. STANDARD

DTS+DOLBY EX

Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.

SUR. STANDARD

DTS ES

Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete)

for DTS sources.

SUR. STANDARD

DTS 96/24 ES

Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete)

for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder.

2-CH

SUR. STANDARD

PRO LOGIC

Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.

SUR. STANDARD

PL x Movie

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.

SUR. STANDARD

PL Movie

Dolby Pro Logic processing for movie software.

SUR. STANDARD

PL x Game

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software.

SUR. STANDARD

PL Game

Dolby Pro Logic processing for game software.

SUR. STANDARD

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie software.

SUR. STANDARD

CS Cinema

SRS Circle Surround processing for movie software.

(U.S.A. model only)

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder.

Sources

Remote

control

button

Program Features

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.

Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to

select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on pages 34 and 35.

For music sources

Sources

Remote

control

button

Program Features

MULTI

2-CH

STEREO

2ch Stereo

2 channel (left and right) playback.

STEREO

7ch Stereo

HiFi DSP processing. Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all

speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at

parties, etc.

MUSIC

Hall in Munich

HiFi DSP processing. This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has

approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is

relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully.

MUSIC

Hall in Vienna

HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately

1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which

produce a very full, rich sound.

MUSIC

Freiburg

HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big

church with a high dome and columns along each side. The reverberation delay is

very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field

programs.

MUSIC

The Bttm Line

HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”,

a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in

a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

MUSIC

The Roxy Thtr

HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data

for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual

seat is at the center-left of the hall.

MUSIC

Pop/Rock

CINEMA DSP processing. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets

you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert.

MUSIC

Classic/Opera

CINEMA DSP processing. This program provides excellent vocal depth and

overall clarity by restraining excessive reverberation. The surround sound field is

relatively moderate but it reproduces beautiful sound using data collected from a

concert hall.

ENTERTAINMENT

Disco

HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively

disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is

also characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound.

THX

THX Music

THX processing for all 5.1 encoded music sources.

MULTI

SUR. STANDARD

q D+PL x Music

Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources.

SUR. STANDARD

DTS+PL x Music

Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources.

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder.

2-CH

SUR. STANDARD

PL x Music

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software.

SUR. STANDARD

PL Music

Dolby Pro Logic processing for music software.

SUR. STANDARD

Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music software.

SUR. STANDARD

CS Music

SRS Circle Surround processing for music software.

(U.S.A. model only)

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLET(S).

■ Setting the sleep timer

1 Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to

set the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front

panel display changes as shown

below. The SLEEP indicator flashes

while switching the amount of time for

the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, and the display returns to the selected sound

field program.

■ Canceling the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on

the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the

SLEEP indicator goes off.

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front

panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Using the sleep timer

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DV D

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

SLEEP

SLEEP 120 min SLEEP 90 min

SLEEP 60 minSLEEP 30 minSLEEP OFF

VOLUME

SLEEP

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

SLEEP 120min

VOLUME

SLEEP

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

Hall in Munich

SLEEP

SYSTEM OPTIONS

You can use the following parameters to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates.

Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.

■ HDMI (HDMI menu)

Use to edit HDMI parameters (see page 95).

■ i.LINK Select (i.LINK select menu)

Use to edit i.LINK parameters (see page 91).

■ Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu)

Use to edit sound field parameters (see page 99).

■ Input Select (Input select menu)

Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the output volume of each jack

(see page 55).

■ Manual Setup (Manual setup menu)

Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings (see page 58).

Sound (Sound menu)

Use to manually adjust the sound parameters.

Basic (Basic menu)

Use to quickly setup basic system parameters.

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Item Features Page

I/O Assignment Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.

Audio Select Selects the type of input signal to be used.

Decoder Mode Selects the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks.

Volume Trim Adjusts the output volume of each jack.

Rename Changes the name of the input.

Item Features Page

LFE Level Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Parametric EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker.

Tone Control Adjusts the tonal balance of the speakers and headphones.

Audio Option Customizes overall audio settings for this unit.

Item Features Page

Test Tone Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set, Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings.

Speaker Set

Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output,

and the cross over frequency.

Speaker Distance Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.

Speaker Level Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

THX Set Adjusts the THX settings.

SYSTEM OPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Option (Options menu)

Use to adjust the optional system settings.

■ Auto Setup (Auto setup menu)

Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 27).

■ System Memory (System memory menu)

Use to save and recall various settings (see page 69).

■ Audio Info. (Audio signal information menu)

Use to check audio signal information (see page 40).

Item Features Page

Display Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays.

Multi Zone Customizes the Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone B settings.

Sur.Initialize Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound field programs.

Audio Select Selects the initial input mode of the source.

Decoder Mode Selects the decoder used by this unit.

Memory Guard Locks the menu parameter settings.

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter. (Speaker set is used in the following example

to change parameter settings.)

Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Set >

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

TOP on the remote control.

The top display appears.

2 Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu, then

press h to enter the selected menu.

3 Press k / n repeatedly to select the

parameter you want to adjust.

4 Press ENTER or h, then press k / n

repeatedly to change the setting of the item

you want to adjust.

5 Press EXIT.

If you want to continue adjusting parameter settings, press

ENTER to return to the previously selected menu item.

• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one

page of the GUI display. To scroll through pages, press k / n.

• You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is

set to “On”. If you want to change the parameter values, set

Memory Guard to “Off” (see page 68).

Changing parameter settings

EXIT

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

VOL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET

2-4

TOP

TITLE

Sound

Option

Basic

Manual Setup

Auto Setup

System Memory

Input Select

Stereo/Surround

AMP

SOURCE

Center

Surround

Front

Speaker Set

Speaker Distance

Speaker Level

Test Tone

None

Large

Small

Surround

Surround Back

Presence

Center

Front

Notes

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the parameter values will return to the

factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter

value again.

60Hz

40Hz

90Hz

100Hz

80Hz (THX)

Bass Cross Over

SWFR Phase

Bass Out

Presence

60Hz

40Hz

90Hz

100Hz

80Hz (THX)

Bass Cross Over

SWFR Phase

Bass Out

Presence

SYSTEM OPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use this feature to reassign digital input/outputs, select the

input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the level of the

signal input at each jack.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

TOP on the remote control.

2 Select Input Select, then press h.

3 Select the desired input (CD, DVD, etc.), then

press h to access and adjust.

■ Information (Information)

There are 2 types of GUI displays that show HD Radio

information when the unit is in the tuner mode: station and

music information.

Input Select > TUNER > Information >

Station information

(Band / Frequency / Station name / Program /

Program type)

Station information is available when a station name is

received as data in 4 alphabetical codes.

Music information

Page 1: the summary of music information

(Song title / Artist name / Album name)

Page 2: the details of the song title

Page 3: the details of the artist

Page 4: the details of the album

Page 5: the details of the genre

Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between pages.

Press ENTER on the remote control to hold the display

temporarily. “Hold:ENTER” changes to

“Release:ENTER”. Press ENTER again to release it.

Music information is available only when data programs

are received.

HD Radio information is also available in the front panel display

menu (see page 46).

■ I/O Assignment

(Input/output assignment)

You can assign the digital audio input/output and

component video jacks to other components if this unit’s

initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change

the following parameters to reassign the jacks and

effectively connect more components.

Once the jacks are reassigned, you can select the

corresponding component using the INPUT selector on

the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote

control.

Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) >

I/O Assignment >

Example 1:

To assign the COAXIAL 7 (CD) jack to the DVD input.

1) Select Input Select, then select DVD.

2) Select I/O Assignment > Coaxial Input, then select

7 CD.

Input Select

TOP

TITLE

AMP

SOURCE

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

CBL/SAT

DVD

Input Select

Manual Setup

Auto Setup

Stereo/Surround

Station

Current

Information

Volume Trim

Rename

Music

Freq.

Program Type

Name

Band

Program

87.50MHz

Current

Station

Music

Hold:ENTER [1] 2

Station

Music

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Example 2:

To clear a jack assignment.

1) Select Input Select, then select the input source (DVD,

etc.).

2) Select I/O Assignment, then select the jack assignment

(Optical Output, Optical Input, Coaxial Input or

Component Video).

3) Select NONE, then press ENTER to clear the

assignment.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 89).

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to signals input at the

COAXIAL jack.

■ Audio Select (Audio selection)

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can

select the type of input signal you want to use.

Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Audio Select >

Choices: Auto, i.LINK, HDMI, Coax/Opt, Analog

• Select “Auto” if you want signals to be input to this

unit in the following order: i.LINK signals,

HDMI

signals, digital signals

and analog signals.

• Select “i.LINK” if you only want i.LINK signals to be

input to this unit. If no i.LINK signals are input, no

sound is output.

• Select “HDMI” if you only want HDMI signals to be

input to this unit. If no HDMI signals are input, no

sound is output.

• Select “Coax/Opt” if you want digital signals to be

input to this unit at the OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks.

Use if i.LINK or HDMI signals are also being input.

• Select “Analog” if you only want analog signals to be

input to this unit. If no analog signals are input, no

sound is output.

If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the

decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound

field program.

• You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the

power is turned on (see page 68).

• DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD

encoded in DTS.

If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any

way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you

make a digital connection between this unit and the player.

■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode)

Use this feature to switch the input mode. You can

designate the reassigned digital input jacks (see page 55)

for specific audio signals (DTS, etc.).

Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) >

Decoder Mode >

Choices: Auto, DTS

• Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically

detect input signal types and select the appropriate

input mode.

• Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the

input mode.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 89).

■ Volume Trim (Volume trimming)

You can adjust the level of the signal input at each jack.

This is useful if you want to balance the level of each

input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when

switching between input sources.

Manual Setup > Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) >

Volume Trim >

Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 89).

You can only adjust the volume for the current input source using

this setting.

Notes

Optical Input

Coaxial Input

Optical Output

I/O Assignment

Audio Select

Decoder Mode

i.LINK

HDMI

Auto

Audio Select

Decoder Mode

Volume Trim

I/O Assignment

Note

DTS

Auto

Decoder Mode

Volume Trim

Rename

Audio Select

I/O Assignment

Volume Trim

Rename

Decoder Mode

Audio Select

0.0dB

SYSTEM OPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Rename (Rename)

Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the

GUI or the front panel display menu. (DVD is used as the

source component in the following example.)

Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Rename

1 Press an input selector button to select the

input you want to change the name of.

2 Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under

the space or character you want to edit.

3 Press ENTER to select a character type

(CAPITAL/SMALL/FIGURE/MARK).

4 Press k / n to select the character you want

to use and l / h to move to the next one.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

• Press n to change the character in the following

order, or press k to go in the reverse order. Press

ENTER to switch between character types:

CAPITAL A to Z, space

SMALL a to z, space

FIGURE 0 to 9, space

MARK !, #, %, &, etc.

• Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input.

5 Press l / h to select OK and press ENTER

when complete.

• To change source names in the display window on the remote

control, see page 75.

• This menu item is also available in the changing source names

in the display window feature (see page 75), and in the front

panel display system options menu (see page 89).

You can only change the name of the current input source

(except for multi channel input sources) using this setting.

■ Multi CH Assign

(Multi channel assignment)

Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input

into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a

source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from an

external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the

additional front signals.

Input Select > MULTI CH > Multi CH Assign >

Input Channels

This setting is used to select the number of channels input

from an external decoder.

Choices: 6ch, 8ch

If Zone2 Amplifier (page 67) is set to “Internal”, no sound is

output from the surround back speakers even if you select “8ch”.

In this case, select “6ch” and set the output setting of the external

component to 6 channels.

Front Input

If you selected “8ch” in Input Channels, you can select

analog jacks at which front signals from an external

decoder will be input.

Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2,

V-AUX, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 89).

Note

CAPITAL

OK RESET

DVD

Decoder Mode

Volume Trim

Rename

Note

Input Channels

Front Input

Multi CH Assign

Volume Trim

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

TOP on the remote control.

2 Select Manual Setup, then press h.

3 Select Sound, then press h.

4 Select the desired parameters, then press h

to access and adjust.

■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level)

Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency

effect) channel according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries

low-frequency special effects which are only added to

certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

To access these parameters, select:

Manual Setup > Sound > LFE Level >

Choices: –20.0 to 0.0 (dB)

Speaker (Speaker low-frequency effect level)

Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.

Headphone (Headphone low-frequency effect

level)

Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 89).

Depending on the settings of LFE Level, some signals may not be

output at the SUBWOOFER jack.

■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range)

Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to

be applied to your speakers and headphones. This setting

is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital

and DTS signals.

To access these parameters, select:

Manual Setup > Sound > Dynamic Range >

Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard),

MIN (minimum)

Speaker (Speaker dynamic range)

Select to adjust the speaker compression.

Headphone (Headphone dynamic range)

Select to adjust the headphone compression.

• Select “MAX” to preserve the greatest amount of

dynamic range.

• Select “STD” for general use.

• Select “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume

levels.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 89).

Manual Setup (Sound)

TOP

TITLE

AMP

SOURCE

Dynamic Range

LFE Level

Tone Control

Audio Option

Parametric EQ

Sound

Basic

Option

Speaker

Headphone

0.0dB

Note

Speaker

Headphone

STD

MIN

MAX

SYSTEM OPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer)

Use this feature to adjust the parametric equalizer for any

speaker.

Manual Setup > Sound > Parametric EQ >

1 Press k / n to select Test Tone or the speaker

you want to adjust.

• Test Tone turns on or off the test tone output

when adjusting the tonal quality of each speaker.

• Front L adjusts the tonal quality of the front left

speaker.

• Front R adjusts the tonal quality of the front right

speaker.

• Center adjusts the tonal quality of the center

speaker.

• Surround L adjusts the tonal quality of the

surround left speaker.

• Surround R adjusts the tonal quality of the

surround right speaker.

• Surround Back L adjusts the tonal quality of the

surround back left speaker.

• Surround Back R adjusts the tonal quality of the

surround back right speaker.

• Presence L adjusts the tonal quality of the

presence left speaker.

• Presence R adjusts the tonal quality of the

presence right speaker.

2 Press h to access the settings window.

3 Press l / h to select PARAM, then press

ENTER to select a parameter from Band

(band), Freq. (frequency) or Q (Q factor).

4 Press n to select EDIT and press ENTER to

access the edit window.

The parameter selected in PARAM is highlighted.

•Press l / h to adjust the parameter.

•Press k / n to adjust the Gain.

• Press ENTER to exit the edit window.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied

with the results.

If you want to reset all PEQ parameter settings for the

selected speaker, select RESET and press ENTER.

6 Select EXIT and press ENTER to exit the

settings window.

• If you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu as a

graphic equalizer.

• For more information on the parametric equalizer, see

“PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION” on page 114.

Front L

Front R

Test Tone

Dynamic Range

LFE Level

Tone Control

Audio Option

Parametric EQ

Front L

Band / Gain

PARAM RESET

EDIT EXIT

Front R

Center

Test Tone

Front L

Freq.

Gain

Band

1.000

125.0Hz

0.0dB

Front R

Center

Test Tone

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ Tone Control (Tone control)

Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your

speakers and headphones.

Manual Setup > Sound > Tone Control >

Choices: Control, Bass, Treble

Control (Tone control)

Choices: Defeat, Speakers, Headphones

• Select “Defeat” if you do not want to make any

adjustments.

• Select “Speakers” to adjust the bass/treble balance of

your speakers.

• Select “Headphones” to adjust the bass/treble balance

of your headphones.

Bass (Bass control)

Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your

speakers or headphones.

Choices: 125Hz, 350Hz, 500Hz (frequency)

–6.0dB to +6.0dB (gain), initial setting: 0.0dB

Treble (Treble control)

Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your

speakers or headphones.

Choices: 2.5kHz, 3.5kHz, 8.0kHz (frequency)

–6.0dB to +6.0dB (gain), initial setting: 0.0dB

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 89).

Tone Control is not effective when:

– THX (pages 49 to to 50) or PURE DIRECT (page 38) is

selected.

– MULTI CH INPUT is selected.

■ Audio Option (Audio options)

Use to customize this unit’s overall audio settings.

Manual Setup > Sound > Audio Option >

Choices: Muting Type, Audio Delay, PR/SB Select

Muting Type (Muting type)

Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the

output volume.

Choices: Full, –20dB

• Select “Full” to completely halt all output of sound.

• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

Audio Delay (Audio delay)

Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the

video image. This may be necessary when using certain

LCD monitors or projectors.

Choices: 0 to 240 (ms)

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 89).

Speakers

Headphones

Defeat

Bass

Treble

Control

Bass

Treble

Control

Speaker

Freq : 125Hz

Gain : 0.0dB

-6

Bass

Treble

Control

Speaker

Freq : 3.5kHz

Gain : 0.0dB

-6

Note

Muting Type

Audio Delay

PR/SB Select

-20dB

Full

Muting Type

Audio Delay

PR/PB Select

0ms

SYSTEM OPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

PR/SB Select (Presence/surround back speaker

selection)

Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound

simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker

set when playing sources that contain surround back

channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field

programs.

Choices: Presence, Surround Back

• Select “Presence” to use presence speakers even when

surround back channel signals are input. The signals

for the surround back channel will be output from

surround speakers.

• Select “Surround Back” to use surround back speakers

when a surround back channel signal is detected in a

CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will

be output from front speakers.

Use this menu to set up basic system parameters.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

TOP on the remote control.

2 Select Manual Setup, then press h.

3 Select Basic, then press h.

4 Select the desired parameters, then press h

to access and adjust.

• Most of the parameters described in the basic menu are set

automatically when you run auto setup. You can use the basic

menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend running

auto setup first.

• You can reset these parameters by performing the auto setup

procedure (see page 27).

Muting Type

Audio Delay

PR/SB Select

Surround Back

Presence

Manual Setup (Basic)

TOP

TITLE

AMP

SOURCE

Test Tone

Speaker Distance

Speaker Level

Speaker Set

Sound

Basic

Option

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ Test Tone (Test tone)

Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set,

Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings.

Manual Setup > Basic > Test Tone >

Choices: Off, On

• If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point

upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the

meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each

speaker to 75 dB.

• This menu item is also available in the front panel display

system options menu (see page 88).

Loud test tones will be output when “On” is selected. In this case,

make sure no children are present in the listening room.

■ Speaker Set (Speaker set)

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.

Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Set >

Choices: Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back,

Presence, Bass Out, Bass Cross Over, SWFR Phase

If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,

you can change these settings according to your preference.

Set any THX speakers to Small.

Front (Front speakers)

Choices: Large, Small

• Select “Large” if you have large front speakers. The

unit directs the entire range of the front left and right

channel signals to the front left and right speakers.

• Select “Small” if you have small front speakers. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front

channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out.

Center (Center speaker)

Choices: Large, Small, None

• Select “Large” if you have a large center speaker. The

unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal

to the center speaker.

• Select “Small” if you have a small center speaker. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center

channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out.

• Select “None” if you do not have a center speaker. The

unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front

left and right speakers.

Surround (Surround left/right speakers)

Choices: Large, Small, None

• Select “Large” if you have large surround left and right

speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the

surround speakers. The entire range of the surround

channel signal is directed to the surround left and right

speakers.

• Select “Small” if you have small surround left and right

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

channel are directed to the speakers selected with Bass

Out.

• Select “None” if you do not have surround speakers.

This sets the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode

(see page 39) and automatically sets the surround back

speaker setting (Surround Back) to “None”.

Note

Off

Speaker Set

Speaker Distance

Test Tone

Large

Small

Center

Surround

Front

Large

Small

NoneSurround

Surround Back

Center

Front

Large

Small

NoneSurround Back

Presence

Surround

Center

Front

SYSTEM OPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Surround Back (Surround back left/right

speakers)

Choices: Large x1, Small x1, Small x2, Large x2,

None

• Select “Large x1” if you have a large surround back

speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the

surround back channel signal to the surround back left

speaker.

• Select “Small x1” if you have a small surround back

speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround

back channel are directed to the speakers selected with

Bass Out, and the rest of the frequency signals are

directed to the surround back left speaker.

• Select “Small x2” if you have two small surround back

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

back channels are directed to the speakers selected with

Bass Out.

• Select “Large x2” if you have two large surround back

speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the

surround back channel signal to the surround back

speakers.

• Select “None” if you do not have a surround back

speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back

channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.

If you select “Large x1” or “Small x1”, connect a speaker to the

SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker terminals.

Presence (Presence speakers)

Choices: None, Yes

• Select “None” if you do not have presence speakers.

This unit directs all presence channel signals to the

front left and right speakers.

• Select “Yes” if you have presence speakers.

When Zone2 Amplifier is set to “Internal” (see page 67),

Presence is automatically set to “None”.

Bass Out (Bass out)

LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. These

low-frequency signals can be directed to both front left

and right speakers, and to the subwoofer (which can be

used for both stereo reproduction and sound field

programs).

Choices: Both, SWFR, Front

THX recommendation: SWFR

• Select “Both” to direct LFE signals to the subwoofer.

Front L/R low-frequency signals are directed to both

the subwoofer and front channels, and all other

low-frequency signals are directed in accordance with

other speaker settings.

• Select “SWFR” if you connected a subwoofer. The unit

directs all LFE and low-frequency signals in

accordance with other speaker settings.

• Select “Front” if you have not connected a subwoofer.

The unit directs all low-frequency and LFE signals to

the front speakers (even if you have previously set

Front to Small in Speaker Set).

Bass Cross Over (Bass cross over)

Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency

for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the

selected frequency are sent to the subwoofer.

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (THX), 90Hz, 100Hz,

110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

THX recommendation: 80Hz (THX)

Note

Small x1

Small x2

Large x1

None

Large x2

Surround Back

Presence

Bass Out

Surround

Center

None

Yes

Surround Back

Presence

Bass Out

Bass Cross Over

Surround

Notes

Both

SWFR

Front

Surround Back

Presence

Bass Out

Bass Cross Over

SWFR Phase

60Hz

40Hz

80Hz (THX)

90Hz

100Hz

Presence

Bass Out

Bass Cross Over

SWFR Phase

SYSTEM OPTIONS

SWFR Phase (Subwoofer Phase)

If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to

adjust the frequency phase characteristics of your

subwoofer.

Choices: Normal, Reverse

• Select “Normal” not to reverse the phase for your

subwoofer(s).

• Select “Reverse” to reverse the phase for your

subwoofer(s).

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 88).

■ Speaker Distance (Speaker distance)

Use this feature to manually input the distance of each

speaker and adjust the delay applied to the respective

channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance

from the main listening position. However, this is not

possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount

of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker

so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the

same time.

Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Distance >

Unit (Unit)

Choices: Meter (m), Feet (ft)

Initial setting:U.S.A. and Canada models: Feet (ft)

Other models: Meter (m)

• Select “Meter” to input speaker distances in meters.

• Select “Feet” to input speaker distances in feet.

Speaker distances

Choices: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)

Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

• Front L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.

• Front R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker.

• Center adjusts the distance of the center speaker.

• Surround L adjusts the distance of the surround left

speaker.

• Surround R adjusts the distance of the surround right

speaker.

• Surround Back L adjusts the distance of the

surround back left speaker.

• Surround Back R adjusts the distance of the

surround back right speaker.

• Presence L adjusts the distance of the presence left

speaker.

• Presence R adjusts the distance of the presence right

speaker.

• Subwoofer adjusts the distance of the subwoofer.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 88).

• You cannot adjust the distance of speakers set to “None” in

Speaker Set.

• If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to

the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the

distance in Surround Back L.

Normal

Reverse

Bass Out

Bass Cross Over

SWFR Phase

Speaker Distance

Speaker Level

Test Tone

Speaker Set

Front L

Front R

Subwoofer

Unit

Center

THX Set

Meter

Feet

Front L

Front R

Subwoofer

Unit

Presence R

Notes

SYSTEM OPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Speaker Level (Speaker level)

Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left speakers and each speaker selected

in Speaker Set (see page 62).

Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Level

Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

• Front L adjusts the balance of the front left speaker.

• Front R adjusts the balance of the front right speaker.

• Center adjusts the balance of the center speaker.

• Surround L adjusts the balance of the surround left

speaker.

• Surround R adjusts the balance of the surround right

speaker.

• Surround Back L adjusts the balance of the surround

back left speaker.

• Surround Back R adjusts the balance of the

surround back right speaker.

• Presence L adjusts the balance of the front left and

presence left speakers.

• Presence R adjusts the balance of the front left and

presence right speakers.

• Subwoofer adjusts the balance of the subwoofer.

• To calibrate correctly to THX reference levels, use Test Tone

(see page 62).

• This menu item is also available in the front panel display

system options menu (see page 88).

• You cannot adjust the level of channels set to “None” in

Speaker Set.

• If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to

the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the

balance in Surround Back L.

■ THX Set (THX settings)

Use to manually adjust the THX settings.

Manual Setup > Basic > THX Set >

SB Speaker Dist. (Surround back speaker

distance)

Use this feature to optimize the surround sound field when

you have to place the surround back speakers apart.

Choices:

U.S.A. and Canada models: under 1ft, 1 – 4ft, over 4ft

Other models: under 0.3m, 0.3 – 1.2m, over 1.2m

• Select “under 0.3m” or “under 1ft” if the distance

between the two surround back speakers is less than

0.3 m (1 ft).

• Select “0.3 – 1.2m” or “1 – 4ft” if the distance between

the two surround back speakers is between 0.3 and 1.2

m (1 and 4 ft).

• Select “over 1.2m” or “over 4ft” if the distance

between the two surround back speakers is more than

1.2 m (4 ft).

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 88).

Notes

Speaker Distance

Presence R

Subwoofer

Speaker Level

Speaker Set

Front R

Center

Front L

THX Set

Speaker Level

Information

Input Mode

THX Set

SB Speaker Dist.

Output

Dimmer

Speaker B

Zone 3 Volume

Speaker Distance

Support Audio

Information

Input Mode

SB Speaker Dist.

0.3-1.2m

over 1.2m

Dimmer

Zone 3 Volume

Input Assign

under 0.3m

SYSTEM OPTIONS

This menu adjusts the optional system settings.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

TOP on the remote control.

2 Select Manual Setup, then press h.

3 Select Option then press h.

4 Select the desired parameters, then press h

to access and adjust.

5 When finished adjusting parameters, press

ENTER.

■ Display (Display)

Use this feature to adjust the GUI and front panel displays.

Manual Setup > Option > Display >

Choices: Dimmer, Video Conv., Short Message, Position,

Wall Paper

Dimmer (Dimmer)

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Choices: –4 to 0

Video Conv. (Video conversion)

Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite

(VIDEO) signals to both S-video and component signals.

This allows you to output converted video signals at

the S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no

S-video or component signals are input. This feature also

converts S-video signals to component signals when no

component signals are input.

Choices: Off, On

• Select “Off” not to convert any signals.

• Select “On” to convert composite signals to S-video

and component signals, and to convert S-video signals

to component signals.

When using the THX system, we recommend setting Video Conv.

to “Off”.

• Converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT

jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video

connections (composite or S-video) between each component.

• When converting composite video or S-video signals from a

VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer

depending on your VCR.

Short Message (Short message)

Use this feature to turn on/off the short message display.

Choices: Off, On

• Select “Off” to turn off the short message display.

• Select “On” to turn on the short message display.

• The short message display may not display properly depending

on the type of input signal and video monitor used.

• If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, the short message display is not

displayed even if “On” is selected.

Position (Position)

Use to adjust the vertical and horizontal position of the

GUI display.

Choices: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right)

•Press k to raise the position of the GUI display.

•Press n to lower the position of the GUI display.

•Press h to shift the position of the GUI display to the

right.

•

Press

to shift the position of the GUI display to the left.

Wall Paper (Wallpaper)

Use this feature to select the background when no image is

input from an external source. If you do not want to

display the background, select None.

Choices: None, Yes, Gray

If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, no background is displayed even if

“Yes” is selected.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 90).

Manual Setup (Option)

TOP

TITLE

AMP

SOURCE

Multi Zone

Display

Audio Select

Decoder Mode

Sur.Initialize

Sound

Basic

Option

Display

Sur.Initialize

Multi Zone

Short Message

Position

Dimmer

Video Conv.

Wall Paper

Notes

Note

SYSTEM OPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Multi Zone (Multi zone)

Use this feature to customize the Zone 2 and Zone B

settings.

Manual Setup > Option > Multi Zone >

Choices: Speaker B, Zone2 Amplifier, Zone2 Volume,

Zone3 Volume

Speaker B (Speaker B)

Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers

connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

Choices: Main, Zone B

• Select “Main” to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B

when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B

terminals are set in the main room.

• Select “Zone B” if the speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If

SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is

turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in

the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound

from SPEAKERS B only.

• If you select “Zone B” and connect headphones to the PHONES

jack on this unit, the sound is output from both the headphones

and SPEAKERS B.

• When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters

the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

Zone2 Amplifier (Zone 2 amplifier)

Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers are amplified.

Choices: Internal, External

• Select “External” if you connect your Zone 2 speakers

through an external amplifier connected to this unit’s

ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks.

• Select “Internal” to use this unit’s internal amplifier if

you connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s

PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals.

• Select “None” if you do not want to use the Zone2

feature.

• When “Internal” is selected, the presence speaker setting

automatically switches to “None”.

• When “Internal” is selected, the Zone2 volume setting

automatically switches to “Variable”.

Zone2 Volume (Zone 2 volume)

Use to select how the volume control will operate with

regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. When Zone2

Amplifier is set to “Internal”, this feature is automatically

set to “Variable”.

Choices: Fixed, Variable

• Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume

level to a standard line level.

• Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT

volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote

control.

Zone3 Volume (Zone 3 volume)

Use to select how the volume control will operate with

regard to the ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks.

Choices: Fixed, Variable

• Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume

level to a standard line level.

• Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 3 OUTPUT

volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote

control.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 90).

■ Sur.Initialize (Surround initialize)

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound

field program within sound field program groups. When

you initialize a sound field program group, all of the

parameter values within that group revert to their initial

settings.

Adjusted sound field parameter settings are displayed in

blue.

Manual Setup > Option > Sur.Initialize

Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT,

MOVIE THEATER, SURROUND, All

• Press k / n to select the sound field program you want

to initialize, then press ENTER.

• Select “All” to initialize settings for all sound field

program parameters.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 90).

Sound field program groups cannot be initialized when Memory

Guard is set to “On” (see page 68).

Notes

Display

Sur.Initialize

Audio Select

Multi Zone

Zone2 Amplifier

Zone2 Volume

Speaker B

Zone3 Volume

Note

Multi Zone

Display

STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAINMENT

MOVIE THEATER

SURROUND

All

Audio Select

Decoder Mode

Sur.Initialize

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ Audio Select (Audio selection)

Use this feature to designate the default input mode this

unit selects when the power is turned on and the input

source (such as a DVD player) is connected to the

DIGITAL INPUT jacks on this unit.

Manual Setup > Option > Audio Select

Choices: Auto, Last

• Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically

detect input signal types and select the appropriate

input mode.

• Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically

select the last input mode used for the connected

source.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 89).

Selecting “Last” does not recall the last setting for the

EXTD SUR. button.

■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode)

You can select the decoder used by this unit.

Manual Setup > Option > Decoder Mode

Choices: Auto, Last

• Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically

detect input signal types and select the appropriate

decoder.

• Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically

select the last decoder used for the connected source.

■ Memory Guard (Memory Guard)

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

Manual Setup > Option > Memory Guard

Choices: Off, On

Select “On” to protect:

• DSP program parameters

• All menu items except Memory Guard and System

Memory – Load.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 90).

In general, front panel and remote control operations are not

affected when Memory Guard is set to “On”. However, you

cannot adjust the tone control using Tone Control.

Note

Multi Zone

Audio Select

Sur.Initialize

Decoder Mode

Auto

Last

Memory Guard

Sur. Initialize

Decoder Mode

Audio Select

Memory Guard

Auto

Last

Note

Decoder Mode

Audio Select

Memory Guard

Off

SYSTEM OPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This feature allows you to save up to six of your favorite

settings that can be easily recalled when needed. You can

save settings such as the following:

• Sound field program parameters

• Speaker settings

• Speaker channel settings

• LFE level

• Dynamic range settings

• Parametric equalizer settings

■ To save settings

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

TOP on the remote control.

2 Select System Memory, then press h.

3 Select Save, then press ENTER.

Current displays the current settings of this unit.

4 Press k / n repeatedly to select the memory

number under which you want to save the

settings, then press h.

“Save: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of

the window.

5 Press ENTER to save the settings.

■ To recall settings

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

TOP on the remote control.

2 Select System Memory, then press h.

3 Select Load, then press ENTER.

4 Press k / n repeatedly to select the memory

number you want to recall, then press h.

“Load: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of

the window.

5 Press ENTER to recall the settings.

Memory 1 and Memory 2 settings can be recalled simply by

pressing MEMORY 1/2 on the remote control.

When you press MEMORY 1, the message “Load Memory 1?

Yes:Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press

MEMORY 1 once more to recall the settings.

When you press MEMORY 2, the message “Load Memory 2?

Yes:Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press

MEMORY 2 once more to recall the settings.

System Memory

TOP

TITLE

AMP

SOURCE

Sci-Fi

Speaker

SpeakerCH

LFE Level

D-Range

PEQ

A:ON B:OFF

3/4/0.1

0dB

MAX

Reset

Current

Memory 1

Memory 2

TOP

TITLE

AMP

SOURCE

Sci-Fi

Speaker

SpeakerCH

LFE Level

D-Range

PEQ

A:ON B:OFF

3/4/0.1

0dB

MAX

Reset

Current

Memory 1

Memory 2

Memory 3

MEMORY1 2

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by

YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the

appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire

functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter.

■ Controlling this unit

The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit

after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the

AMP mode.

■ Controlling other components

The shaded areas below can be used to control other

components. Each button has a different function

depending on the selected components. Select the

component you want to control by pressing an input

selector button or SELECT k / n. The name of the

selected component appears in the display window.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Control area

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

EXIT

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

1 2B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERSMEMORY

PRESET

The buttons inside

the dotted lines

control this unit in

any mode

(SYSTEM

POWER,

STANDBY,

SLEEP, AUDIO

SELECT, the input

selector buttons,

VOL +/–, MUTE,

PURE DIRECT and

STRAIGHT/

EFFECT).

AMP/SOURCE/

Set to AMP to

operate this unit.

Display

window

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

EXIT

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

1 2B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERSMEMORY

PRESET

EXIT

FREQ/RDS

EON

MODE

PTY SEEK

START

REC

DISC SKIP

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDIO

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

1 2B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

–

SPEAKERSMEMORY

PRESET

Component

control area

You can control up

to 14 different

components by

setting appropriate

remote control

codes (see page 81).

The A/B and input

selector buttons

switch the function

of the component

control area below.

Use the A/B

buttons to control

other components

regardless of whether

they are connected to

this unit.

Factory setting:

A...LD player

B...Tape deck

Display

window

AMP/

SOURCE/

Set to

SOURCE to

operate the

component

selected with

an input

selector

button.

Set to TV to

operate the

television

(you must set

the remote

control code

in DTV or

PHONO).

SELECT k / n

switches control to

another component

without changing

the input source on

this unit.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Controlling optional components

(OPTN area)

OPTN is an additional component control area that can be

programmed with remote control functions independently

from any input source. This area is useful for

programming commands that are to be used only as a part

of a macro function or for components that do not have a

valid remote control code.

To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until

OPTN appears in the display window.

• You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 73

to program buttons operated within this component control

area.

• The OPTN area cannot be used when “2001” or “2003” is

selected in the amplifier library (see page 72).

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area. For a complete list of available remote

control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL

CODES” at the end of this manual.

The following table shows the default component

(Library: component category) and the remote control

code for each input area.

Remote Control Code Default Settings

You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even

if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above.

In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.

2 Press an input selector button to select the

source component you want to set up.

Notes

Setting remote control codes

Input area

Library

(component

category)

Default YAMAHA

code

ALD2200

BTAPE2700

PHONO TV –

TUNER TUNER 2602

CD CD 2300

MULTI CH

INPUT

DVD 2102

V-AUX VCR –

CBL/SAT CABLE –

MD/TAPE MD 2500

CD-R CD-R 2400

DTV TV –

VCR 1 VCR –

DVR/VCR2 DVR 2807

DVD DVD 2102

Note

AMP

SOURCE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

3 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds

using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

The library name (ex. “L:DVD”) and the selected

component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in

the display window.

If you want to setup for another component, press the input

selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component.

• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,

otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

If you want to change a library (component

category), press l / h. You can set a

different type of component.

Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L;CD,

L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN (tuner),

L;AMP

, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:SAT (satellite),

L:VCR

* The amplifier library (L;AMP) code is preset to “2000” in

order to operate this unit. However, you can switch by

entering one of the following 4 codes if necessary.

Setting remote control AMP codes

Select one of the following codes to set the remote control

AMP code for the component you want to use.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE, then

change the remote control code settings.

Setting remote control tuner codes

Select one of the following codes to set the remote control

tuner code for the component you want to use.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and the unit to the

tuner mode by pressing TUNER on the remote control,

then change the remote control code settings.

When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you

may be able to operate the other components simultaneously

with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the

alternative codes to operate this unit separately.

4 Press ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected component

appears in the display window.

“0000” appears in the display window if no code has been

set.

5 Press the numeric buttons to enter the

four-digit remote control code for the

component you want to use.

For a complete list of available remote control codes,

refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at

the end of this manual.

6 Press ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window if setting was

successful.

“NG” appears in the display window if the setting

was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.

If you continuously want to set up another code for another

component, press the input selector button or

SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4

through 6.

Notes

AMP library

code

(remote

control

setting)

Function

Remote

control

AMP ID

(this unit’s

setting:

see page 86)

2000

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

2001

To operate this unit using

the default code.

To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3

features (see page 82).

2002

To operate this unit using an

alternative code.

ID2

2003

To operate this unit using an

alternative code.

To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3

features of other YAMAHA

receivers/amplifiers

(see page 82).

LEARN

Tuner

library code

(remote

control

setting)

Function

Remote

control

tuner ID

(this unit’s

setting:

see page 86)

2602

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

2603

To operate this unit using an

alternative code.

ID2

Note

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

SPEAKERSMEMORY

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

7 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

8 Press one of the buttons shaded below to

see if you can control your component. If you

can, the remote control code is correct.

If the manufacturer of your component has more than one

code, try each of them until you find the correct one.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more

than one button simultaneously.

• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes

for commercially available audio and video components

(including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible

with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote

control function using the Learn feature (see “Programming

codes from other remote controls (Learn)”) or use the remote

control supplied with the component.

• Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over

remote control code functions.

Use the learn feature if you want to program functions not

included in the basic operations covered by remote control

codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not

available. You can program any of the buttons available in

the component control area (see page 70). The buttons can

be programmed independently for each component.

This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote

control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most

of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some

special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the

operating instructions for the other remote control.)

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.

2 Press an input selector button to select a

source component.

3 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm

(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control

on a flat surface so that their infrared

transmitters are aimed at each other.

Notes

LEARN

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS

EON

MODE

PTY SEEK

START

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

Programming codes from other

remote controls (Learn)

Note

AMP

SOURCE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DV D

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

4 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

“LEARN” and the selected component name (ex.

“DVD”) appear alternately in the display window.

• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control

code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

5 Press the button for which you want to

program the new function.

“LEARN” appears in the display window.

6 Press and hold the button you want to

program on the other remote control until

“OK” appears in the display window.

“NG” appears in the display window if learning was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5.

• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5

and 6.

• If you continuously want to program another function for

another component, press SELECT k / n to select the

component, then repeat steps 5 and 6.

7 Press LEARN again to exit the learning

mode.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more

than one button simultaneously.

• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.

However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may

appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this

case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room

for further learning.

• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:

– When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other

components are weak.

– When the distance between the two remote controls is too

great or too small.

– When the remote control infrared windows are not facing

each other at the appropriate angle.

– When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.

– When the function to be programmed is continuous or

uncommon.

Notes

LEARN

EXIT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DV D

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOL

–

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DV D

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

Notes

LEARN

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can change the name that appears in the display

window on the remote control if you want to use a

different name than the factory preset. This is useful when

you have set the input selector to control a different

component.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2 Press an input selector button to select the

source component you want to rename.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

3 Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, press RE-NAME again.

4 Press k / n to select and enter a character.

Pressing n changes the character as follows:

A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon),

/ (slash), and space.

(Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.)

5 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next

position.

6 Press ENTER to set the new name.

“OK” appears in the display window if renaming was

successful.

“NG” appears in the display window if renaming was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.

If you continuously want to rename another component,

press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select

the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6.

7 Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming

mode.

“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than

one button simultaneously.

Changing source names in the

display window

Note

AMP

SOURCE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

RE-NAME

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET

Note

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET

RE-NAME

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example,

when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button

to start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button.

The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros

(see page 77).

You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC

OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component.

For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.)

When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV or PHONO (see page 71), you can turn on the power of your TV

without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO.

When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.

Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD

recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that

component (see page 73) or set a remote control code (see page 71).

Using the Macro feature

Macro buttons First Second Third

—

(*1)

—

(CD area) (*4)

—

(MD/TAPE area) (*4)

(CD-R area) (*4)

—

(VCR 1 area) (*4)

(DVR/VCR 2 area) (*4)

(DVD area) (*4)

POWER

SYSTEM

(CD area)

Press a macro button To automatically transmit these signals in order

STANDBY

POWER

SYSTEM

POWER

SYSTEM

(*1)

POWER

(*2)

PHONO

POWER

SYSTEM

PHONO

TUNER

(*3)

MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN

AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Macro operations

1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON.

2 Press a macro button.

• When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO

ON/OFF to OFF.

• While the remote is carrying out a Macro program, it will not

accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is

complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing).

• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro

is operating until the macro operation is complete.

■ Programming macro operations

You can program your own macros and use the macro

feature to transmit several remote control commands in

sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote

control codes or perform learning operations before

programming the macro. We do not recommend

programming continuous operations such as volume

control in a macro.

• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is

programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again

when the programmed macro is cleared.

• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default

macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.

3 Press the macro button you want to use to

operate the macro.

The macro button name (ex. “M:DVD”) and the

selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear

alternately in the display window.

“AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a

button other than a macro button.

Notes

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS

EON

MODE

PTY SEEK

START

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

MACROMACRO ON/OFF

Macro buttons

Notes

Note

AMP

SOURCE

MACRO

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

4 Press the buttons for the functions you want

to include in the macro operation in

sequence.

You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you

have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote

control automatically exits the macro mode.

To change the selected source component, press

SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will

program a macro step, whereas SELECT k / n only changes

the selected component and corresponding component control

area.

5 Press MACRO again when the operation

sequence you want to program is complete.

“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a

button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press

more than one button simultaneously.

You can clear all changes made in each function set, such

as learned functions, macros, renamed source names and

setup remote control codes.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“CLEAR” appears in the display window.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, press CLEAR again.

3 Press k / n to select the clear mode.

L;CD (L: name of a component)

Clears all learned functions in the respective

component control area. Press an input selector

button to select the component.

L;AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control

area.

L;ALL Clears all learned functions.

M;ALL Clears all programmed macros

RNAME Clears all renamed source names.

FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote

to the factory settings.

4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3

seconds.

“WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing

was successful, “C;OK” appears in the display

window.

Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the

button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer

setting, if you have set remote control codes).

“L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to

complete.

Note

Memory back-up

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. If the memory is cleared, insert new batteries,

set up the remote control code(s) and program any

acquired functions that may have been cleared.

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

Indicates the

number of macro

steps entered

Flashes alternately so you can

set the next step

MCR 1: DVD

MCR 2: AV POWER

MCR 3: AUDIO SELECT

Clearing function sets

Note

AMP

SOURCE

CLEAR

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clear mode.

• “C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 3.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than

one button simultaneously.

■ Clearing a learned function

You can clear the function learned for a certain button in

each control area.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.

2 Press an input selector button to select the

source component containing the function

you want to clear.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

“LEARN” and the selected component name

(ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display

window.

• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote

control code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

Notes

CLEAR

Clearing individual functions

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

LEARN

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

4 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen

or similar object, then press the button you

want to clear for about 3 seconds.

“C;OK” appears in the display window if clearing

was successful.

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 4.

• If you continuously want to clear another function for

another component, press SELECT k / n to select the

component, then repeat step 4.

• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the

factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have

set remote control codes).

5 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode.

The remote control returns to the learning mode.

6 Press LEARN again to exit.

• “C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than

one button simultaneously.

■ Clearing a macro function

You can clear the function programmed for a certain

macro button.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.

3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen

or similar object, then press the macro

button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.

“C;OK” appears in the display window if clearing

was successful.

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 3.

• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts

to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you

have set remote control codes).

4 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode.

The remote control returns to the macro

programming mode.

5 Press MACRO again to exit.

• “C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than

one button simultaneously.

Notes

Note

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

AMP

SOURCE

MACRO

Notes

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you

can use this remote to control your other components.

Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the

selected component. Use the input selector buttons to

select the component you want to operate. The remote

control automatically switches to the appropriate control

mode for that component.

This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.

These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO.

When the remote control code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area.

These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1.

These buttons function for U.K. and Europe models only.

These buttons function for the U.S.A. model only.

Controlling each component

FREQ/RDSFREQ/RDS EONEON MODEMODE PTY SEEKPTY SEEK STARTSTART

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

EXIT

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERSMEMORY

PRESET

EXIT

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOL

–

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET

DVD player/

DVD recorder

VCR

Cable TV/

Satellite tuner

TV LD player CD player

MD recorder/

CD recorder

Tape deck Tuner

1 AV PO WE R

Power

VCR power

Power

2 TV POWER

TV power

Power

TV power

3 TV VOL +

TV volume +

Volume +

TV volume +

TV VOL –

TV volume –

Volume –

TV volume –

CH +

TV channel +

Channel +

Channel + Channel +

TV channel +

CH –

TV channel –

Channel –

Channel – Channel –

TV channel –

TV INPUT

TV input

Input

TV input

TV MUTE

TV mute

Mute

TV mute

4 TITLE

Title Title Title Title Band

5 MENU

Menu Menu Menu

Program

select

6 ENTER

Menu enter Menu select Menu select

k Menu up Menu up Menu up

Preset up

(1 to 8)

n Menu down Menu down Menu down

Preset down

(1 to 8)

Menu left Menu left Menu left

Preset down

(A to E)

h Menu right Menu right Menu right Direction A/B

Preset up

(A to E)

7 RETURN

Return Return Return Return

8 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons

Preset stations (1-8)

9 ll

backward

VCR search

backward

VCR search

backward

FREQ

hh Search forward Search forward

VCR search

forward

VCR search

forward

Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward

EON

b Skip backward

Chapter/Skip

backward

Skip backward Skip backward Direction back

PTY MODE

a Skip forward

Chapter/Skip

forward

Skip forward Skip forward

Direction

forward

PTY START

REC/

DISC SKIP

Disc skip (player)

Rec (recorder)

Rec

VCR rec

Disc skip Rec Rec

s Stop Stop

VCR stop

Stop Stop Stop Stop

e Pause Pause

VCR pause

Pause Pause Pause Pause

h Play Play

VCR play

Play Play Play Play

0 AUDIO

Audio Audio

A DISPLAY

Display Display Display Display Display Display

Display

B ENTER

Enter Enter/recall

Enter/

numeric button

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit

to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control

this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control.

You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room.

• An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second

and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).

• An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room.

• A video monitor for the second room.

• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit

in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult

with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center

for the Zone 2/Zone 3 connections that best meet your

requirements.

• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the

CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products,

you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six

YAMAHA components can be connected as shown.

■ System configuration and connections example

Using external amplifiers

To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, select “External” in Zone2 Amplifier (page 67).

• When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the

amplifier in the second/third room.

• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third

room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit.

Zone 2/Zone 3 connections

OUT

CONTROL OUT

This unit

Notes

REMOTE OUT

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

MONITOR OUT

SP OUT

REMOTE 1 IN

ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT

ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT

REMOTE 2 IN

MAIN

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT

Infrared emitter

DVD player

(or other component)

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Second room Third roomMain room

SYSTEM

This unit

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Using this unit’s internal amplifier

To use this unit’s internal amplifier, select “Internal” in Zone2 Amplifier 2 (page 67).

You can control the input or adjust the volume level for

Zone 2 and Zone 3 components using ZONE CONTROL

on the front panel.

1 Set REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel to

SOURCE/REMOTE.

2 Press MAIN, ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to select the

zone you want to change the input for or

adjust the volume level.

Press each button repeatedly to turn the respective

zone on or off.

You can choose from the following modes:

ZONE2 Controls the Zone 2 component

connected to the ZONE 2 AUDIO L/R

jacks on this unit.

ZONE3 Controls the Zone 3 component

connected to the ZONE 3 AUDIO L/R

jacks on this unit.

MAIN Controls the main component

(this unit).

3 Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel

repeatedly to choose the zone you selected

in step 2.

Each time you press ZONE CONTROL, the front

panel display changes as shown below, and the

indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for

approximately 5 seconds.

• You must complete this step within 5 seconds of pressing

ZONE CONTROL on the front panel. Otherwise, the zone

mode selection process is automatically canceled.

In this case, press ZONE CONTROL again.

• The initial setting is “ZONE 2” when both the Zone 2 and

Zone 3 components connected to this unit are turned on.

• If you selected MAIN in step 2, no indicator flashes on the

front panel display when ZONE CONTROL is pressed.

4 Use the INPUT or VOLUME selector on the

front panel to switch the input or adjust the

volume level for the selected zone

component.

You must complete this step within 5 seconds of performing

step 2. Otherwise, the zone mode selection process is

automatically canceled. In this case, repeat steps 2 and 3

again.

–

PRESENCE/ ZONE 2

Second room

This unit

Controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 from the

front panel

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR 2

MAIN ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

MAIN

INPUT

VOLUME

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

The supplied remote control can be used to control

Zone 2/Zone 3. You can even select the input source and

control components located in the main room directly

from the second/third room regardless of the listening

condition in the main room.

■ To enable Zone mode on the remote

control

You will be able to switch the remote control mode from

one room to another, and use the input selector,

STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and

VOLUME +/– to control the selected room.

1 Set REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel to

SOURCE/REMOTE.

2 Repeat steps 1 through 3 of the procedure in

“Setting remote control codes” on page 71.

3 Press l / h to select “L;AMP”.

4 Press ENTER.

“2000” appears in the display window.

5 Enter the code number “2001” or “2003”.

For details, see page 72.

6 Press ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window if setting was

successful.

7 Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup.

The remote control will be able to operate this unit

from Zone 2 or Zone 3.

■ To control Zone 2/Zone 3

1 Press SELECT k repeatedly to display

“ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” in the display window.

2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 or

Zone 3 power on.

3 Press an input selector button to select the

input source you want to listen to in the

second/third room.

The display window shows “2: name of selected

input” or “3: name of selected input” if the remote

control is in the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.

Signals input at V-AUX and PHONO jacks cannot be sent to

Zone 2/Zone 3.

4 You can control the unit from Zone 2 or Zone

3 by using the input selector, STANDBY,

SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/–

buttons.

* VOLUME +/– can be used only when Zone2 Volume or

Zone3 Volume is set to “Variable” in the GUI menu

(see page 67).

Controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 using

the remote control

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR 2

ENTER

LEARN

Note

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DV D

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

EXIT

PURE DIRECT

TOP

TITLE

SELECT

VOL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

ADVANCED

OPERATION

5 Press SELECT k / n to exit from the

Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.

• The source in Zone 2 and the source available for recording are

always the same.

• “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” will appear in the display window only

when k is pressed, and “SYSTM” only when n is pressed.

■ Turning on this unit or setting it to the

standby mode

SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently

depending on the selected mode that appears on the

display window.

• When normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you

can turn on the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 or set them

to the standby mode individually.

• When System mode is selected, or when “2000” or

“2002” (see page 72) is selected as the amplifier library

(L;AMP) code, pressing SYSTEM POWER turns on

the main unit only. However, pressing STANDBY sets

everything (the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3) to the

standby mode simultaneously.

“MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM

POWER or STANDBY is pressed.

To control Zone 2 or Zone 3 again when System mode is selected

and the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are in the standby mode,

press SYSTEM POWER to turn on the main unit, then repeat

steps 1 through 5 of the procedure in “To control Zone 2/Zone 3”

on pages 84 and 85.

■ Special considerations for DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to

send the DTS signal to the second/third room you will

only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers).

Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need

to be made when playing DTS encoded discs.

For DVDs encoded with DTS

Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the

second/third room.

Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed

2-channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or

Dolby Digital soundtrack.

For CDs encoded in DTS

To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the

Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

Notes

LCD display

SYSTEM POWER/

STANDBY

Normal mode

Name of component

Turns on the main

unit only or sets it to

the standby mode.

Zone 2 mode

“Zone2” or “2:name of

component”

Turns on Zone 2 or

sets it to the standby

mode.

Zone 3 mode

“Zone3” or “3:name of

component”

Turns on Zone 3 or

sets it to the standby

mode.

System mode

“SYSTM”

SYSTEM POWER:

turns on the main

unit only.

STANDBY:

sets everything

(the main unit,

Zone 2 and Zone 3)

to the standby mode

simultaneously.

Note

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the

front panel display.

This menu offers additional operations to adjust and

customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial

settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect

the needs of your listening environment.

1 Make sure this unit is in the standby mode.

2 On the front panel, while holding down

STRAIGHT/EFFECT, press STANDBY/ON.

3 Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired menu

item.

The name of the selected item appears in the front

panel display.

4 Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to change the

setting.

5 Press STANDBY/ON to save the new setting

This unit enters the standby mode.

The new setting is activated next time you turn on the power of

this unit.

The remote controls and VOLUME control on the front panel of

this unit are ineffective while you are using the advanced setup

menu.

■ SP IMP. (Speaker impedance)

Use to set the impedance of this unit so that it matches that

of your speakers.

Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN

• Select “6ΩMIN” for speakers 6 ohms or higher.

• Select “8ΩMIN” for speakers 8 ohms or higher.

■ PRESET (User preset)

Use to reset all of this unit’s parameters to the initial

factory settings with the exception of System Memory and

Auto Setup settings.

Choices: CANCEL, RESET

• Select “CANCEL” if you do not want to reset this

unit’s parameters.

• Select “RESET” to reset this unit’s parameters.

This setting does not affect advanced setup menu item

parameters.

■ REMOTE AMP (Remote control AMP ID)

Use to set this unit’s ID for remote control recognition

(see page 72).

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control amplifier library

code is set to “2000” or “2001”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control amplifier library

code is set to “2002” or “2003”.

■ REMOTE TUN (Remote control tuner ID)

Use to set this unit’s tuner ID for remote control

recognition (see page 72).

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control tuner library

code is set to “2602”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control tuner library

code is set to “2603”.

■ FAN MODE (Fan operation mode)

Use to set the operation of this unit’s cooling fan.

Choices: AUTO, CONT.

• Select “AUTO” to set the fan to operate automatically

according to the temperature of this unit.

• Select “CONT.” to set the fan to operate continuously

regardless of the temperature of this unit.

< Asia and General models only >

■ TU (Tuner frequency step)

Use to set the tuner frequency step according to the

frequency spacing in your area.

Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50

• Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South

America.

• Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.

■ LANG. (GUI language)

Use to set the language that appears in this unit’s GUI

(graphical user interface) display.

Choices: ENGLISH, JAPANESE, FRENCH, GERMAN

You can select the language of your choice.

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS

Advanced setup menu

Note

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

STANDBY

/ON

PROGRAM

Note

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This is a complimentary menu that allows you to access

most GUI menu system option parameters without using a

video monitor.

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2 Press DISPLAY on the remote control to

enter the menu.

3 Press k / n repeatedly to select an item, then

press ENTER to enter the selected item.

4 Press k / n repeatedly to select the

parameter you want to adjust.

5 Press ENTER, then press l / h repeatedly to

change the setting of the item you want to

adjust.

6 Press DISPLAY to exit.

If you want to adjust another parameter, press RETURN to return

to the previously selected menu item.

■ AUTO SETUP

Front panel display system options menu

EXIT

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

VOL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET

2,6

3-5

Item Sub-items Features

SETUP

AUTO

• Use to specify the speaker parameters auto setup

adjusts.

• Corresponds to Setup Type in the GUI menu

(see page 29).

NATURAL

FRONT

FLAT

• Use to specify the equalizer characteristics auto setup

uses.

• Corresponds to Setup Menu – Equalizing in the GUI

menu (see page 28).

START [ENTER] • Use to activate the auto setup procedure.

• Corresponds to Start in the GUI menu (see page 29).

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS

■ MANUAL SETUP

1 BASIC MENU

Item Sub-items Features

A)SPEAKER SET

FRONT;;;;SMALL

CENTER;;;;;SML

SURR LR;;;;SML

SURR B;;;SMLx2

PRESENCE;;NONE

BASS OUT;;SWFR

CrossOver;80Hz

SWFR PHASE;NRM

• Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the

speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the

cross over frequency.

• Corresponds to Speaker Set in the GUI menu

(see page 62).

B)SP DISTANCE

UNIT;;;;meters

FRONT L;;3.00m

FRONT R;;3.00m

CENTER;;;3.00m

SURR L;;;3.00m

SURR R;;;3.00m

SB L;;;;;3.00m

SB R;;;;;3.00m

SWFR;;;;;3.00m

PRES L;;;3.00m

PRES R;;;3.00m

• Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.

• Corresponds to Speaker Distance in the GUI menu

(see page 64).

• Set the unit to “meters” or “feet” to input speaker

distances in meters or in feet.

UNIT;;;;;;feet

FRONT L;;10.00ft

FRONT R;;10.00ft

CENTER;;;10.00ft

SURR L;;;10.00ft

SURR R;;;10.00ft

SB L;;;;;10.00ft

SB R;;;;;10.00ft

SWFR;;;;;10.00ft

PRES L;;;10.00ft

PRES R;;;10.00ft

C)SP LEVEL

FL-----||-----

C-----||-----

FR-----||-----

SL-----||-----

SB.L----||-----

SB.R----||-----

SR-----||-----

SWFR-----||-----

PR.R----||-----

PR.L----||-----

• Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

• Corresponds to Speaker Level in the GUI menu

(see page 65).

D)TEST TONE

TEST TONE;;OFF

TEST TONE;;;ON

• Outputs a test tone to calibrate your speaker levels.

• Corresponds to Test Tone in the GUI menu

(see page 62).

E)THX SET

SB Dis: <0.3m

SB Dis: 0.3-1.2m

SB Dis: >1.2m

• Adjusts the THX settings.

• Corresponds to THX Set in the GUI menu

(see page 65).

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

2 SOUND MENU

3 INPUT MENU

Item Sub-items Features

A)LFE LEVEL

SP LFE;;;;;;;0

HP LFE;;;;;;;0

• Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby

Digital or DTS signals.

• Corresponds to LFE Level in the GUI menu

(see page 58).

B)D.RANGE

SP D.R;;;;MAX

HP D.R;;;;MAX

• Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS

signals.

• Corresponds to Dynamic Range in the GUI menu

(see page 58).

C)TONE CON FRQ

BASS SP 350Hz

TRBL SP 3.5kHz

• Adjusts the tonal balance of the speakers and

headphones.

• Corresponds to Tone Control in the GUI menu

(see page 60).

• “BASS SP” and “TRBL SP” appear when no

headphones are connected to this unit, and

“BASS HP” and “TRBL HP” appear when

headphones are connected to this unit.

BASS HP 350Hz

TRBL HP 3.5kHz

D)AUDIO OPTION

A.MUTE;;;;MUTE

A.DELAY;;;;0ms

PRch >SBch

• Customizes overall audio settings for this unit.

• Corresponds to Audio Option in the GUI menu

(see page 60).

Item Sub-items Features

A)I/O ASSIGN

C.V[A] DVD

C.V[B] DTV

C.V[C]CBL/SAT

OUT(1)MD/TAPE

OUT(2) CD-R

IN (3) CD

IN (4) DVD

IN (5) DTV

IN (6) CBL/SAT

IN (7) CD

IN (8) DVD

IN (9)DVR/VCR2

• Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.

• Corresponds to I/O assignment in the GUI menu

(see page 55).

B)INPUT TRIM

DVD;;;;;0.0

• Adjusts the output volume of each jack.

• Corresponds to Volume Trim in the GUI menu

(see page 56).

C)AUDIO SELECT

>AUTO LAST

• Selects the initial input mode of the source.

• Corresponds to Audio Select in the GUI menu

(see page 68).

D)DECODER MODE

>AUTO LAST

• Selects the decoder used by this unit.

• Corresponds to Decoder Mode in the GUI menu

(see page 56).

E)INPUT RENAME

DVD ._ DVD

• Changes the name of the input.

• Corresponds to Rename in the GUI menu

(see page 57).

F)MULTI CH IN

>6CH 8CH

• Selects the number of audio channels input at the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

• Corresponds to Multi CH Assign in the GUI menu

(see page 57).

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS

4 HDMI MENU

5 i.LINK MENU

6 OPTION MENU

Item Sub-items Features

A)INPUT ASSIGN

IN 1 DVD

IN 2 CBL/SAT

• Assigns input sources (such as a DVD player) to the

HDMI IN jacks.

• Corresponds to Input Assign in the GUI menu

(see page 98).

B)SUPPORT AUD.

>4600 OTHER

• Selects the HDMI audio signal playback source.

• Corresponds to Support Audio in the GUI menu

(see page 98).

Item Sub-items Features

A)INPUT ASSIGN

----> ---

----> DVD

• Selects the input assignment for registered i.LINK

components.

• Corresponds to Input Assign in the GUI menu

(see page 93).

• “---” appears if no i.LINK component is registered.

B)AUTO PLAY

<---> PLAYER

----> PLAYER

<---- PLAYER

--X-- PLAYER

• Selects automatic playback for signals input from

i.LINK components connected to this unit.

• Corresponds to Auto Play in the GUI menu

(see page 93).

Item Sub-items Features

A)DISPLAY SET

DIMMER;;;;;;;0

WALL PAPER;;ON

SHORT MSG. ON

V CONV.;;;;;ON

• Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays.

• Corresponds to Display in the GUI menu

(see page 66).

B)MEMORY GUARD

MEM.GUARD;;OFF

• Locks the menu parameter settings.

• Corresponds to Memory Guard in the GUI menu

(see page 68).

C)SURR. INI

PRESS DSP Key

• Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound

field programs.

• Corresponds to Sur.Initialize in the GUI menu

(see page 67).

D)ZONE SET

SP B;;;;MAIN

• Customizes the Zone B parameters.

• Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu

(see page 67).

E)ZONE2 SET

OUT VOL;;;VAR.

ZONE2 AMP;;EXT

• Customizes the Zone 2 parameters.

• Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu

(see page 67).

F)ZONE3 SET

OUT VOL;;;VAR.

• Customizes the Zone 3 parameters.

• Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu

(see page 67).

USING I.LINK

ADVANCED

OPERATION

i.LINK is a high-speed and bi-directional digital interface

in compliance with a global standard approved by the

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

i.LINK enables i.LINK-compatible components to send

and receive digital audio signals (bitstreams such as Dolby

Digital, and DTS; 2-channel linear PCM signals; DSD

signals of Super Audio CD) over a single i.LINK cable.

You can process audio signals by selecting between the

DSD Direct mode where DSD signals are directly output

to DSD-compatible audio DAC and the DSD mode where

DSD signals are changed to PCM signals to ensure rich

sound fields.

i.LINK currently supports three different data transfer

rates: 100 Mbps, 200 Mbps and 400 Mbps.

This unit supports hot plugging, a function that allows you

to disconnect or connect the IEEE1394 cable while the

power is turned on.

■ i.LINK compatibility with this unit

■ Daisy chain connections

Use to link components together in a single chain. You can

link up to 17 different components (including this unit)

with this method.

■ Tree connections

Use to link components in a branched configuration when

3 or more i.LINK connectors are available. You can link

up to 63 different components (including this unit) with

this method.

• When making connections, use a 4-pin IEEE1394 cable that

supports the S400 transmission speed. We also recommend

using a cable less than 3.5 m (10 ft) in length.

• The system will not work if components are connected in a loop

(where the output signal is returned to the original component).

• This unit does not output signals not input at the i.LINK jacks.

• Because the data transfer rates may vary depending on the

arrangement order of i.LINK components, it is advised that you

link i.LINK components with the same data transfer rates.

• Do not disconnect or connect the IEEE1394 cable from this unit

or other i.LINK components while data is being transferred.

Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise.

• When connecting the IEEE1394 cable to this unit’s i.LINK

connectors, be sure to confirm the orientation of the connector

before connecting the cable. Using excessive force to connect

the cable to the connector in the wrong orientation will damage

the connector.

• Do not turn the power of i.LINK components on or off while

data is transferred. Doing so may stop playback. If this happens,

turn this unit to standby mode, and then turn it back on.

• Other i.LINK components connected to this unit need to

support DTCP (Digital Transmission Content Protection).

• This unit supports i.LINK (AUDIO) components only.

Because this unit does not support i.LINK (VIDEO), video

signals, such as MPEG2-TS (BS digital, etc.) or

DV (DV camera, DVD recorder, etc.), are not compatible with

this unit.

• If this unit is in the standby mode or turned off, signals cannot

be output to the next i.LINK component.

USING i.LINK

What is i.LINK?

This unit’s i.LINK interface was based on the

following design standards:

• IEEE1394 Std 1394a-2000

(Standard for a High Performance Serial Bus)

• A&M Protocol

(Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol 2.1)

• DTCP (Digital Transmission Content Protection)

Audio signal

types

Audio signal

formats

Compatible

i.LINK

components

2ch Linear

PCM

2ch, 32-192 kHz

CD, DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio

Multi-ch

Linear PCM

5.1 ch, 32-96 kHz DVD-Audio

Bitstream Dolby Digital,

DTS

DVD-Video

DSD 2ch/5ch/6ch

2.8224 MHz

Super Audio CD

Connecting i.LINK components

Notes

i.LINK

component

i.LINK

component

i.LINK

component

Maximum single cable length: 4.5 m (14.75 ft)

i.LINK

component

i.LINK

component

i.LINK

component

i.LINK

component

Maximum single

cable length:

4.5 m (14.75 ft)

USING i.LINK

■ Assigning i.LINK components

When an i.LINK component is connected, this unit

automatically recognizes the connection and registers up

to 16 i.LINK components. Assigning an i.LINK

component to a specific input allows you to select video

and audio input signals from that component received via

the i.LINK connection for simultaneous playback.

Turn on the power of this unit and the connected

i.LINK component.

The i.LINK component is automatically recognized and

registered in the following order:

DVD → DTV → CBL/SAT → VCR1 → DVR/VCR2 →

V-AUX → PHONO → CD → CD-R → MD/TAPE

“LINK CHECK” flashes on the front panel display during

this procedure.

• If you want to change the input assignment of a registered

i.LINK component, use Input Assign in the GUI menu

(see page 93) or INPUT ASSIGN in the front panel display

system options menu (see page 90).

• Only one i.LINK component is assigned to each input and

inputs that are already assigned are skipped.

• If i.LINK components are assigned to all the inputs available,

no more i.LINK components can be assigned, and audio signals

input from these i.LINK components cannot be played back on

this unit.

■ Listening to playback from i.LINK

components

If an i.LINK component has been assigned to a specific

input, perform the following steps to listen to playback

from the registered i.LINK component.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select the input

assigned to the i.LINK component.

2 Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly to set

“AUTO” or “i.LINK” as the input mode.

3 Start playback on the connected i.LINK

component.

• You can turn on/off automatic playback when an i.LINK

component is selected using the INPUT selector or to select

whether you want the input to switch automatically when an

input stream from a connected i.LINK component is detected

(see page 93).

• Audio signals input at the i.LINK jacks are digitally output only

when AUDIO SELECT is set to either AUTO or i.LINK as the

input mode and REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel is set to

SOURCE/REMOTE.

Use this menu to display information about registered

i.LINK components, delete any unused registered

components, or customize the operation and playback

settings to be used when this unit is connected to an

i.LINK component.

1 Switch on this unit and video monitor.

2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

TOP on the remote control.

The top display appears.

3 Press k / n repeatedly to select i.LINK Select.

4 Press ENTER or h, then press k / n

repeatedly to change the setting of the item

you want to adjust.

5 Press EXIT.

Basic i.LINK operations

Notes

VOLUME

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

A.SEL:AUTO

VCR 1

VOLUME

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

A.SEL:i.LINK

VCR 1

Notes

Changing i.LINK Select

parameters

TOP

TITLE

Sound

Option

Basic

Manual Setup

Auto Setup

System Memory

Input Select

Stereo/Surround

AMP

SOURCE

Information

Select

Auto Play

Information

i.LINK Select

Stereo/Surround

Input Select

HDMI

USING i.LINK

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Information (Information)

Use this feature to display the following information:

operation status of registered i.LINK components,

registered i.LINK components that have been deleted, and

i.LINK signals that are currently being received.

i.LINK Select > Information >

Choices: Details, Delete, Protect, i.LINK Status

• Select Details to display the following information

about the selected i.LINK component.

– Vendor: Displays the name of the manufacturer for

your i.LINK component.

– Model: Displays the model name of your i.LINK

component.

– Active (connected) or Non Active (not

connected): Displays depending on whether your

i.LINK component is connected.

– Audio (for audio signals) or Non Audio (for non-

audio signals): Displays depending on whether your

i.LINK component supports audio signal playback.

– Assign: Displays the name of the input assigned to

the selected i.LINK component.

• Select Delete to delete the selected i.LINK component

from the registered components list. To delete, press

ENTER. You can only delete non-active and

unprotected i.LINK components.

• Select Protect to protect the selected i.LINK

component from being accidentally deleted.

• Select i.LINK Status to display operation status of

i.LINK signals that are currently being received. You

can also use this feature to delete all non-active and

unprotected i.LINK components together at once.

Information about unregistered i.LINK components is not

available in the GUI menu. These i.LINK components cannot be

used on this unit although they can be output to other i.LINK

components.

■ Select (Input select)

Use this feature to select which registered i.LINK

component’s audio signal will be selected for playback.

i.LINK Select > Select >

Select the name of the desired component and press

ENTER to switch the input. When you select the desired

component, its manufacturer and model information

appear along with its input assignment.

■ Input Assign (Input assign)

Use this feature if you want to change the input

assignment of a registered i.LINK component. You can

select to assign the i.LINK component to any of the

various inputs (PHONO to V-AUX).

i.LINK Select > Input Assign >

Choices: PHONO, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE, DVD, DTV,

CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX,

No Assignment

1 Press k / n repeatedly to select the i.LINK

component you want to assign, then press

2 Press k / n repeatedly to select the input for

the i.LINK component, then press ENTER.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 90).

■ Auto Play (Auto Play)

Use this feature to turn on/off automatic playback when an

i.LINK component is selected using the INPUT selector or

to select whether you want the input to switch

automatically when an input stream from a connected

i.LINK component is detected.

i.LINK Select > Auto Play >

Choices: ← – → Player, → → → Player, ← ← ← Player,

– X – Player

•Select ← – →

Player if you want both playback to start

automatically on the i.LINK component selected using

the INPUT selector, and you want this unit to

automatically switch its input to the i.LINK component

which has started playing back.

•Select → → → Player if you want playback to start

automatically on the i.LINK component selected using

the INPUT selector.

•Select ← ← ← Player if you want this unit to

automatically switch its input to the i.LINK component

which has started playing back.

• Select – X – Player to disable automatic playback for

the i.LINK components. This setting also prevents this

unit from automatically switching its input to the

i.LINK component.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 90).

Note

USING i.LINK

■ Status display messages

The following messages may appear on the front panel display depending on the status of this unit.

Playback may stop while this message is displayed.

■ Error messages

The following messages appear on the front panel display if a connection or registration error is detected.

■ i.LINK indicator

i.LINK display messages

Message Contents

LINK CHECK

Flashes while the i.LINK component connection is being checked.

Message Cause Remedy

BUS FULL

The 1394 bus transmission band is full, and no

more data can be transmitted.

This problem may be resolved by disconnecting any

unused i.LINK components.

If an i.LINK component with a slow transmission speed

(S100 or S200) is connected between this unit and the

i.LINK (AUDIO) component which you want to play

back, the bus may become full. Changing the

connection order of the i.LINK components so that this

unit and the i.LINK (AUDIO) component are directly

connected may resolve this problem.

CANNOT LINK

The connected i.LINK component is not

recognized because the connection is

incomplete.

Check that all i.LINK components are connected

properly using an IEEE1394 cable.

LOOP CONNECT

This unit and the i.LINK component are

connected in a loop (where the output signal is

returned to the original component).

Disconnect the IEEE1394 cable, then reconnect it in

either a daisy chain or tree configuration.

NODE OVER

More than 63 i.LINK components (including

this unit) are connected.

Reduce the number of connected components.

HOP OVER

More than 15 i.LINK components are

connected in a daisy chain configuration.

Reduce the number of i.LINK components connected

between the two end components to 15 or less.

Reconnect the i.LINK components using tree-type

connections.

REGIST. OVER

A new i.LINK component is connected to this

unit while 16 i.LINK components are already

registered. This unit can register up to 16

i.LINK components.

Delete any unused registered i.LINK components from

the registered components list and reconnect the

i.LINK component you want to register.

See “Changing i.LINK Select parameters” on page 92.

Lights up When an i.LINK component is connected, and this unit is playing back signals input via

i.LINK connections.

Flashes When an i.LINK component is connected, but this unit is playing back signals input via

connections other than i.LINK or no signals are being input via i.LINK connections.

Off When no i.LINK component is connected.

USING HDMI

ADVANCED

OPERATION

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first

industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital A/V (audio/

video) interface.

Providing an interface between any A/V source (such as a

set-top box or A/V receiver) and an audio/video monitor

(such as a digital television – DTV), HDMI supports

standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as

multi-channel digital audio using a single cable.

HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports

8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to

accommodate future enhancements and requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth

Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure

audio/video interface that meets the security requirements

of content providers and system operators.

For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website

at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.

• Video or audio signals input at audio input jacks other than the

HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output at the

HDMI OUT jack.

• Connect the HDMI OUT jack of other components (such as a

DVD player) to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit.

Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN 1 or

HDMI IN 2 jack of other components (such as a projector).

• You need a commercially available HDMI cable to connect this

unit to other HDMI-compatible components. Use a HDMI cable

shorter than 5 m (15 ft) to ensure stable operations and to

prevent losses of video quality.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or

DVI components.

• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack

↔ DVI-D jack) to connect

this unit to other DVI components.

• Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2

jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks.

• GUI displays or analog video signals input at video input jacks

cannot be output at the HDMI OUT jack. To display analog

video signals, connect them to analog video output jacks.

• Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or

HDMI IN 2 of this unit cannot be digitally output at the

HDMI OUT jack.

• This unit is not compatible with multi-stereo area audio signals

of Super Audio CDs. You can connect devices (such as a DVD

player) to the i.LINK jack or the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

• When connected to a DVD player, audio signals may not be

output depending on the type of the DVD player. In case the

DVD player connected to this unit does not output DVD multi-

channel audio signals at the HDMI OUT jack, connect the DVD

player to the i.LINK jack or analog multi-channel audio input

jacks.

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio plays back, video and

audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the

DVD player.

• Video and audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2

jack cannot be output at the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is

set to the standby mode or the power is turned off.

• When connecting other HDMI components to this unit, refer to

the instruction manuals for those components.

• When HDMI audio signals are output from components like a

DVD player, the audio signal format (such as sampling

frequencies) may be restricted depending on the HDMI video

signal format.

• Do not disconnect or connect the HDMI cable from this unit or

turn off the power of the HDMI/DVI components connected to

the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred.

Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise.

■ HDMI compatibility with this unit

USING HDMI

What is HDMI?

This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following

standards:

• HDMI 1.1 (High-Definition Multimedia Interface

Specification Version 1.1) licensed by HDMI

Licensing, LLC.

• HDCP 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed by Digital

Content Protection, LLC.

Notes

Audio signal

types

Audio signal

formats

Compatible

HDMI

components

2ch Linear

PCM

2ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch

Linear PCM

5.1 ch, 32-96 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital,

DTS

DVD-Video, etc.

USING HDMI

See page 23 for connection information.

■ HDMI video and audio signal flow

Video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or

HDMI IN 2 jack you selected using Select in the GUI

menu (see page 97) or the INPUT selector on the front

panel are output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. In

addition, audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI

IN 2 jack are output to speakers, headphones and REC

OUT.

• Digital audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output

at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks.

• Audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are

output to REC OUT only when REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front

panel is set to SOURCE/REMOTE. Some audio signals may

not be output to REC OUT depending on the signal type.

■ Connecting HDMI video components

■ Connecting HDMI audio components

■ Error messages

In case of an error, an error message appears on the GUI

or the front panel display.

Device Over: more than 5 HDMI components (including

this unit) are connected. Reduce the number of the

connected HDMI components

HDCP Error: HDCP testing failed. Check whether the

connected HDMI components support HDCP copy

protection standards.

■ HDMI indicator

Lights up when an HDMI component is connected, and

this unit is playing back audio signals input via HDMI.

Flashes when an HDMI component is connected, but this

unit is playing back audio signals input via connections

other than HDMI or no audio signals are being input via

HDMI connections.

Turns off when no HDMI component is connected.

Connecting HDMI components

Notes

HDMI OUT HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

This unit

Video

signals

Audio

signals

Video

signals

Audio

signals

HDMI IN

Speakers

Headphones

REC OUT

Audio

signals

DVD player

HDMI IN 1

HDMI IN 2

Component

coaxial

Component D

S-video

Component

RCA

HDMI OUT

Component

coaxial

Component D

S-video

Component

RCA

Digital video signals

Analog video signals

Digital audio signals

Analog audio signals

HDMI OUT

i.LINK

(AUDIO)

HDMI IN 1

HDMI IN 2

Digital audio

(optical/coaxial)

Analog audio

Digital audio

(optical/coaxial)

Analog audio

USING HDMI

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Assigning HDMI components

Assigning an HDMI component to a specific input allows

you to select the video input signals from that component

together with the audio signals received via the HDMI

connection for simultaneous playback.

If you want to change the input assignment of a registered HDMI

component, use Input Assign in the GUI menu (see page 98) or

INPUT ASSIGN in the front panel display system options menu

(see page 90).

■ Listening to playback from HDMI

components

Perform the following steps to listen to playback from a

registered HDMI component.

If the HDMI component has been assigned to a

specific input

1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select the input

assigned to the HDMI component.

2 Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly to set

“AUTO” or “HDMI” as the input mode.

3 Start playback on the connected HDMI

component.

You can change HDMI parameters in the GUI or the front

panel display menu.

Input Assign and Support Audio are also available in the front

panel display system options menu (see page 90). However,

Select and Information are only available in the GUI menu.

■ Select (Select)

Use this feature to select the HDMI component assigned

to either the HDMI IN or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit.

HDMI > Select >

Choices: IN 1, IN 2

Select IN 1 or IN 2 to choose the HDMI component

assigned to either HDMI input jack.

When the HDMI component connected to the selected HDMI IN

jack is not transmitting audio signals (e.g. Super Audio CD or

DVI) and AUDIO SELECT is set to AUTO, audio signals input

at the analog or other digital input jacks will be selected to play

back. It may take a few seconds before this unit outputs sound.

Basic HDMI operations

Note

VOLUME

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

A.SEL:AUTO

VCR 1

VOLUME

L R

V-AUX

DVR/VCR2

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD TUNER

PHONO

A.SEL:HDMI

VCR 1

Changing HDMI parameters

Note

Display

i.LINK Select

Stereo/Surround

HDMI

Select

Input Assign

Speaker B

Support Audio

Display

Input Assign

Support Audio

Select

IN 1

IN 2

Speaker B

Zone 3 Volume

USING HDMI

■ Input Assign (Input assign)

This unit comes with two HDMI IN jacks (HDMI IN 1

and HDMI IN 2). As a default settings, HDMI IN 1 and

HDMI IN 2 are assigned to DVD and CBL/SAT

respectively, but you may alter these settings if necessary.

The same HDMI component cannot be assigned to the

HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks at the same time.

HDMI > Input Assign >

Choices: IN 1, IN 2

Select the HDMI component you want to assign to the

HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack.

Assignable HDMI components:

DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX

■ Support Audio (Support audio)

Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI

audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component

connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit.

HDMI > Support Audio >

Choices: RX-V4600, Other

• Select RX-V4600 to play back HDMI audio signals on

this unit. The audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks

of this unit are not output to the HDMI component

connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit.

• Select Other to play back HDMI audio signals on

another HDMI component connected to the HDMI

OUT jack of this unit.

■ Information (Information)

Use this feature to display information about audio signals

input at the HDMI IN jack you selected.

HDMI > Information >

Choices: Input, Output

Displaying information about HDMI

video signal input

HDMI > Information > Input >

Model: displays the model name of the HDMI component

connected to the HDMI IN jack you selected. Some

HDMI components may not provide this unit with their

model information.

Type: displays the type of video signals (HDMI or DVI)

input at the HDMI IN jack you selected.

Format: displays the format of video signals input at the

HDMI IN jack you selected.

Input: displays the name of the HDMI IN jack you

selected.

Error: displays information about an error.

Displaying information about HDMI

video signal output

HDMI > Information > Output >

Model: displays the model name of the component

connected to the HDMI OUT jack you selected.

Type: displays the type of component (HDMI or DVI)

connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

Error: displays information about an error.

Display

IN 2

Input Mode

IN 1

DVD

DTV

Speaker B

CBL/SAT

Input Assign

Information

Input Mode

Support Audio

RX-V4600

Other

Dimmer

Speaker B

Zone 3 Volume

Select

Display

Output

Input Mode

Input

---

Input ---

Type ---

Error

Format

---

Model

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live

instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of

the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these

reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated,

and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

■ Elements of a sound field

In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming

straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are

two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to

make up the sound field:

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly

(50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting

from one surface only – for example, from the ceiling or a

wall. Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface – walls, ceiling, the back of the room – so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen

the clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberation taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a

concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at

all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly

what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field

processor.

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset

parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial

settings, you can change some of the parameters to better

suit the input source or your listening room. The following

parameters are not always found in every program.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

TOP on the remote control.

2 Select Stereo/Surround, then press h.

3 Select the desired sound field program, then

press h to access and adjust.

You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is set

to “On”. If you want to change the parameter values, set Memory

Guard to “Off” (see page 68).

■

Resetting parameters to the factory values

To reset all parameters

Use Sur.Initialize (see page 67).

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

What is a sound field? Changing parameter settings

Note

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from

being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the

power cable is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power

supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if

the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values

will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the

parameter value again.

TOP

TITLE

AMP

SOURCE

STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAINMENT

MOVIE THEATER

Vienna

Freiburg

Munich

Vienna

Freiburg

Init. Delay

Room Size

DSP Level

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

100

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

■ DSP Level (DSP level)

Function: Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.

Description: Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP

effect level relative to the level of the direct sound.

Control Range: –6 dB to +3 dB

■ Init. Delay (Initial delay)

Function: Changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting the delay

between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.

Description: The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the

farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.

Control range: 1

to 99 ms

■ Room Size (Room size)

Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround

sound field becomes.

Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from

one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

Source sound

Early

reflections

Time Time Time

Initial delay Initial delay Initial delay

Sound source

Reflection face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

Time

Source sound

Early

reflections

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

Sound source

101

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Liveness (Liveness)

Function: Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections

decay.

Description: The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall

surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces

is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”.

The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the

room.

Control range: 0 to 10

■ Sur.Init.Delay (Surround initial delay)

Function: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound

field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels

are used.

Control range: 1 to 49 ms

■ Sur.Room Size (Surround room size)

Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

■ Sur.Liveness (Surround liveness)

Function: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.

Control range: 0 to 10

■ SB.Init.Delay (Surround back initial delay)

Function: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field.

Control range: 1 to 49 ms

■ SB.Room Size (Surround back room size)

Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

■ SB.Liveness (Surround back liveness)

Function: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field.

Control range: 0 to 10

Source sound

Level

Dead

Live

Time

Time Time

Small reflected

sound

Large reflected

sound

Small value = 0

Large value = 10

102

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

■ Rev. Time (Reverberation time)

Function: Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB

(at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range.

Description: The longer the reverberation time, the more “live” the listening room environment seems. The shorter

the reverberation time, the more “dead” the listening room environment seems.

Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s

■ Rev. Delay (Reverberation delay)

Function: Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the

reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you

feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Control range: 0 to 250 ms

■ Rev. Level (Reverberation level)

Function: Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control range: 0 to 100%

Reverberation

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

Source sound

Reverberation time

Reverberation time Reverberation time

Sound source Short

reverberation

Long

reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s

Large value = 5.0 s

Early reflections

(dB)

60 dB

Level

Source sound

Reverberation

Reverberation timeReverberation

delay

Time

Source sound

Level

Reverberation level

Time

103

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Dialogue Lift (Dialog lift)

Function: Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center

channel elements to the presence speakers.

Description: The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound.

Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

For 7ch Stereo

Function: Adjusts the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode.

Control range: 0 – 100%

Center Level (Center level)

Surround L Level (Surround left level)

Surround R Level (Surround right level)

Sur. Back Level (Surround back level)

Presence L Level (Presence left level)

Presence R Level (Presence right level)

For PL x Music and PL Music

Panorama (Panorama)

Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: Off, On

Dimension (Dimension)

Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard)

Center Width (Center width)

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only

from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3

For Neo:6 Music

Center Image (Center image)

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

Control range: 0.0 to 1.0

For SRS Circle Surround

FOCUS

Function: Adjusts the clearness of a sound image by elevating the perception of the sound image to compensate

for non-optimally placed speakers from a lower location.

A larger value makes speakers sound as if they are positioned at ear level.

Control range: 0 to 8

TruBass

Function: Adjusts the lower register by producing the perception of improved low frequency performance.

A larger value improves bass even without a subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence

of a subwoofer.

Control range: 0 to 8

104

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

■ Decode Type (Decoder type)

For MOVIE THEATER

Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using MOVIE THEATER programs.

Choices: Pro Logic / Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6

For THX Cinema

Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema.

Choices: Pro Logic / Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6

For SURROUND Standard

Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Standard.

Choices: Pro Logic / PL Movie / PL Music / PL Game / PL x Movie / PL x Music / PL x Game /

Neo:6 Cinema / Neo:6 Music / CS Cinema* / CS Music* (* U.S.A. model only)

For SURROUND Enhanced

Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Enhanced.

Choices: Pro Logic / Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6

Pro Logic x appears when the surround back speakers are available, and Pro Logic appears when the surround back speakers are not

available.

■ Initialize (Initialize)

Function: Initializes the parameters for each sound field subprogram.

Choices: NO, YES

If you want to initialize all of the parameters within a sound field program group, use Sur.Initialize (see page 67).

Note

TROUBLESHOOTING

105

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the

nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

This unit fails to turn

on when STANDBY/

ON (or SYSTEM

POWER) is pressed,

or enters in the

standby mode soon

after the power has

been turned on.

The power cable is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable firmly.

—

The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit

and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for

each connection does not touch anything other than

its respective connection.

15–17

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the

power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use

it normally.

—

No sound Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

18–23

The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone.

—

The input mode is set to “i.LINK”,

“HDMI”, “Coax/Opt” or “Analog”.

Set the input mode to “Auto”.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,

MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons on

the remote control.

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.

The front speakers to be used have not

been selected properly.

Select the front speakers by pressing

SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or by setting

AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then pressing

SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control).

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to

cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

The input mode is set to “Analog” while

playing a source encoded with a DTS

signal.

Set the input mode to “Auto” or “Coax/Opt”.

The signals this unit cannot reproduce are

being received from a source component

e.g.: a CD-ROM.

Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.

—

The i.LINK components connected to this

unit do not support the DTCP copy

protection standards.

Connect i.LINK components that support the DTCP

copy protection standards.

—

The HDMI components connected to this

unit do not support the HDCP copy

protection standards.

Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP

copy protection standards.

—

Support Audio is set to Other and HDMI

audio signals are not being played back on

this unit.

Set Support Audio to RX-V4600 in the GUI menu.

No picture The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Turn on the video conversion function.

106

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the impedance selector setting is correct.

Check the speaker wires are not touching each other

and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute.

Only the speaker on

one side can be

heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Incorrect balance settings in the GUI

menu.

Adjust the Speaker Level settings.

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a

CINEMA DSP program, the source signal

is directed to the center channel, and the

front and surround speakers output effect

sounds.

No sound from the

effect speakers

The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn them on.

You are using a source or program

combination that does not output sound

from all channels.

Try another sound field program.

No sound from the

center speaker

The output level of the center speaker is

set to minimum.

Raise the level of the center speaker.

Center is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker.

One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for

7ch Stereo) has been selected.

Try another sound field program.

No sound from the

surround speakers

The output level of the surround speakers

is set to minimum.

Raise the output level of the surround speakers.

Surround is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and

right speakers.

A monaural or stereo source is being

played with STRAIGHT.

Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn on the sound

fields.

—

No sound from the

surround back

speakers

Presence speakers are selected. Select “Surround Back” in PR/SB Select.

Surround is set to “None” in Speaker Set. If the surround left and right speakers are set to

“None”, surround back speakers are automatically set

to “None”. Select the appropriate setting for the

surround left and right speakers.

Surround Back is set to “None” in

Speaker Set.

Select “Small x1”, “Small x2”, “Large x1” or

“Large x2”.

No sound from the

subwoofer

Bass Out is set to “Front” when a Dolby

Digital or DTS signal is being played.

Select “SWFR” or “Both”.

Bass Out is set to “SWFR” or “Front”

when a 2-channel source is being played.

Select “Both”.

The source does not contain low bass

signals.

107

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

Dolby Digital or DTS

sources cannot be

played. (Dolby Digital

or DTS indicator on

the front panel

display does not light

up.)

The connected component is not set to

output Dolby Digital or DTS digital

signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operations

instructions for your component.

—

The input mode is set to “Analog”. Set the input mode to “Auto” or “Coax/Opt”.

A “humming” sound

can be heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

—

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the

GND terminal of this unit.

The volume level is

low while playing a

record.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

The turntable should be connected to this unit through

an MC-head amplifier.

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the OUT

(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.

Turn on the power to the component.

—

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

It is not possible to record the sound effect

with a recording component.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to this

DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack.

The source component is not connected to

this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks.

18–22

Some components cannot record the

Dolby Digital or DTS sources.

A source cannot be

recorded by an

analog component

connected to the

AUDIO OUT jacks.

The source component is not connected to

this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks.

Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO

IN jacks.

18–22

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings on this

unit cannot be

changed.

Memory Guard is set to “On”. Select “Off”.

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the AC power cable from the outlet and

then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

—

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears on the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio-

frequency equipment,

or this unit.

This unit is too close to the digital or

radio-frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment.

—

The picture is

disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

This unit suddenly

enters the standby

mode.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and

then turn it back on.

—

108

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Tuner

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away

or the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multipath interference.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned in.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

Preset the stations again.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for the best reception.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Noises result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors,

thermostats and other electrical

equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

—

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.

—

109

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

The remote control

does not work or

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-

axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly.

When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position.

When operating the component selected by the input

selector button, set it to the SOURCE position.

When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO

area, set it to the TV position.

—

The remote control code was not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly using

“LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end

of this manual.

Try setting another code of the same manufacturer

using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at

the end of this manual.

This unit’s library code and the remote

control ID do not match.

Switch the library code.

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

Program the necessary functions independently into

the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.

The remote control

does not “learn” new

functions.

The batteries of this remote control and/or

the other remote control are too weak.

Replace the batteries.

The distance between the two remote

controls is too much or too little.

Place the remote controls at the proper distance.

The signal coding or modulation of the

other remote control is not compatible

with this remote control.

Learning is not possible.

—

Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for

the new functions.

GLOSSARY

110

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. It

provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels

(left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels.

An additional channel especially for bass effects, called

LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the

system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1

channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround

speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and

surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby

Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to

minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range

channels and the precise sound orientation generated

using digital sound processing provide listeners with a

previously unheard of excitement and realism.

■ Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using

a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from

the 2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby

Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks

recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and

realistic moving sound especially with scenes that have

“flyover” and “fly-around” effects.

■ Dolby Pro Logic

Dolby Pro Logic is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround

software. This new technology enables a 5-channel

playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center

channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of

only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology). Music and Game modes are also available

for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode.

■ Dolby Pro Logic x

Dolby Pro Logic x is a new technology enabling 6.1 or

7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-

channel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a

Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games.

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ DSD

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio

signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio

CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at

a high-frequency sampling rate of approximately 2.8224

MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to

reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high

quantization of audio signals. Due to the a high sampling

rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered

by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.

■ DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality

for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully

backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers

to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz

sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length.

DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original

96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with

full-quality full-motion video for music programs and

motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can

enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation

of DTS digital surround in your home. This system

produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound

(technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround

channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a

total of 5.1-channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES

decoder that enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding

a surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel

format.

GLOSSARY

Audio formats

111

GLOSSARY

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for

6 channel playback by. It enables playback with the full-

range channels with higher separation comparable to

digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available;

“Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema

mode” for movies.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code

modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ SRS CS (SRS Circle Surround )

SRS CS (SRS Circle Surround ) is a

high-performance 6.1 channel matrix surround sound

decoding system. It is the next-generation of the original

SRS Circle Surround technology, incorporating powerful

industry-first features including the dialog clarity

enhancement technology and added cinema-like bass to

the front channels and subwoofer.

■ CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed

for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room

size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in

the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured

data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original

sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,

Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and

audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room

of your own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects without any surround speakers by using

virtual surround speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a

minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center

speaker.

■ ASA (Advanced Speaker Array)

ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes

the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to

provide the optimal surround sound experience. When you

set up your home theater system using all eight speaker

outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround

Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and

Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close

together facing the front of the room will provide the

largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to

place the Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to

go THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the setting that

most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which

will re-optimized the surround sound-field.

ASA is used in three new modes: THX Select2 Cinema,

THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode.

■ ITU-R

ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R

recommends a standard speaker placement which is used

in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering

studios.

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by

the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies

that can be played back, and the higher the number of

quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

Sound field programs

Audio information

112

GLOSSARY

■ THX Cinema processing

THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies

established by the world-renowned film production

company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’

personal desire to make your experience of the film

soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home

theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director

intended.

Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres

called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back

in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions.

This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto

Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for

playback in a small home theatre environment.

THX engineers developed patented technologies to

accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre

environment into the home, correcting the tonal and

spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX

indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in

Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).

Adaptive decorrelation

In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers

help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but

in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This

can make the surround speakers sound like headphones

that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround

sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you

move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive

decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time

and phase relationship with respect to the other surround

channel. This expands the listening position and

creates – with only two speakers – the same spacious

surround experience as in a movie theatre.

Re-equalization

The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively

bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment

in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be

played back in large movie theatres using very different

professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the

correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a

small home environment.

Timbre matching

The human ear changes our perception of sound

depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a

movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so

that the surround information is all around you. In a home

theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of

your head. The timbre matching feature filters the

information going to the surround speakers so that they

more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound

coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless

panning between the front and surround speakers.

■ THX Games Mode

For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the

THX Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX

ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all

5.1 and 2.0 encoded game sources such as analog, PCM,

DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game

audio surround information, providing a full 360 degree

playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it

gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the

surround field.

■ THX Music Mode

For the replay of multi-channel music the THX Music

Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA

processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1

encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital and

DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.

■ THX Select2

Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2

certified, it must incorporate all the features described in

THX Cinema processing and also pass a rigorous series of

quality and performance tests. Only then can a product

feature the THX Select2 logo, which is your guarantee

that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give

you superb performance for many years to come.

THX Select2 requirements cover every aspect of the

product including power amplifier and pre-amplifier

performance and operation, and hundreds of other

parameters in both the digital and analog domain.

■ THX Select2 Cinema mode

THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all

8 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching

experience. In this mode ASA processing blends the side

surround speakers and back surround speakers providing

the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround

sounds.

DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital

Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be automatically

detected in THX Select2 Cinema mode if the appropriate

flag has been encoded.

Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing

the digital flag that allows automatic switching. If you

know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in

Surround EX, you can manually select the THX Surround

EX playback mode; otherwise, THX Select2 Cinema

mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum

replay.

113

GLOSSARY

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ THX Surround EX

THX Surround EX-Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint

development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd.

In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been

encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are

able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added

during the mixing of the program. This channel, called

Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in

addition to the currently available front left, front center,

front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer

channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity

for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings

more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization

than ever before.

Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital

Surround EX technology, when released into the home

consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the

packaging. A list of movies created using this technology

can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com.

A list of available DVD software titles encoded with this

technology can be found at www.thx.com.

Only receiver and controller products bearing the

THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX

mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the

home.

This product may also engage the THX Surround EX

mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is

not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such cases the

information delivered to the Surround Back channel will

be program dependent and may or may not be pleasing

depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of

the individual listener.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the

B and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be

reproduced more faithfully with this system because each

of these signals is independent. The component signal is

also called the “color difference signal” because the

luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.

A monitor with component input jacks is required in order

to use the component signal for output.

■ Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal

is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;

color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite

video jack on a video component transmits these three

elements combined.

■ S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the

S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss

and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

Video signal information

PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION

114

This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the

Parametric EQ settings (see page 59), to optimize the

frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to

match your listening environment. YPAO uses a

combination of the following three parameters

(Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise

adjustment of the frequency characteristics.

■ Frequency

This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave

increments between 63 Hz and 16 kHz.

■ Gain

This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB

between –20 and +6 dB.

■ Q factor

The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as

the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the

values 0.5 and 10.

YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your

listening requirements using a combination of the above

three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each

equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit

has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.

The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise

adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).

This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as

in Figure 1).

Figure 1

Figure 2

PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION

Gain

Frequency

Original frequency

characteristic

Band 1

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Gain

Frequency

Band 1

Band 2

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Original frequency

characteristic

SPECIFICATIONS

115

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 130 W

• Maximum Power (EIAJ)

[Asia, General, China and Korea models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ..........................................................180 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

[U.S.A., Canada, Asia, General, China, Korea and Australia

models]

8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 165/205/260/340 W

• DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω......................................................... 190 W

•Dynamic Headroom

[U.S.A., Canada, Asia, General, China, Korea and Australia

models]

8 Ω ...................................................................................... 1.03 dB

• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................140 W

• Damping Factor (IHF)

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 140 or more

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ

CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Signal

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) .............................. 100 mV or more

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more

• Output Level/Output Impedance

REC OUT ............................................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω

SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

[U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. and Europe models]

• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω

• Frequency Response

CD to Front L/R ............................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to REC OUT

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less

CD, etc. to Front L/R

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R

[U.S.A., Canada, Asia, General, China and Korea models]

.............................................................................. 86 dB or more

[Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ...................... 81 dB or more

CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................................... 100 dB

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more

CD (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R ........... 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency ..................................................350 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency ............................................3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) ...........12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .........................................................24 dB/oct.

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type (Wall Paper)

[Asia, China, Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ................ PAL

[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] .................... NTSC

• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)

[Asia, General, China, Australia, U.K. and Europe models]

.............................................................................................. PAL

[Other models] .................................................................... NTSC

• Signal Level

Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)

Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (Pb/Pr)

• Maximum Input Level .......................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 60 dB or more

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite, S-video .................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• Selectivity ................................................................................ 70 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

HD [U.S.A. model only] ...................................................... 80 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%

HD [U.S.A. model only] ..................................................... 0.03%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz)

Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB

HD [U.S.A. model only] ...................................................... 70 dB

• Frequency Response

Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB

HD [U.S.A. model only] ................ 20 Hz to 18 kHz, +0.5, –3 dB

• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω

SPECIFICATIONS

116

SPECIFICATIONS

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

HD [U.S.A. model only] ...................................................... 80 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

HD [U.S.A. model only] ..................................................... 0.03%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz)

HD [U.S.A. model only] ...................................................... 70 dB

• Frequency Response (20 Hz to 12.5 kHz)

HD [U.S.A. model only] ............................................. +0.5/–3 dB

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General model] .............. AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[Asia model].................................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA

[Other models] ................................................................... 500 W

• Standby Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.2 W or less

[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less

[Other models] ....................................................... 0.15 W or less

• Maximum Power Consumption [General model only]

6ch, 10% THD .................................................................. 1100 W

•AC Outlets

[U.S.A. and Canada models]..... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)

[Australia and U.K. models] .............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum)

[Asia and General models] ................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

[China and Europe models] ................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum)

• Dimensions (W x H x D) .............................. 435 x 171 x 438.5 mm

(17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17-1/4”)

• Weight .................................................................. 18.0 kg (39.7 lbs)

LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES

CABLE

ABC 0030, 0035

AMERICAST 0926

BELL SOUTH 0926

BIRMINGHAM CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

0303

BRITISH TELECOM 0030

CABLE & WIRELESS

1095

DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,

1904

DIRECTOR 0503

FILMNET 0470

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0030, 0303, 0503,

0837,

GOLDSTAR 0171

HAMLIN 0036, 0300

JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503,

0837

LG 0171

MNET 0470

MEMOREX 0027

MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,

1133

NTL 1095

NOOS 0844

ONO 1095

PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX

0030

PACE 0264, 1087, 1095

PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134

PARAGON 0027

PHILIPS 0332, 0344

PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904,

1904

PULSAR 0027

QUASAR 0027

REGAL 0300, 0306

RUNCO 0027

SAGEM 0844

SAMSUNG 0027, 0171

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

0035, 0504, 0904,

1904

SONY 1033

STARCOM 0030

SUPERCABLE 0303

TS 0030

TELE+1 0470

TELEWEST 1095

TORX 0030

TOSHIBA 0027

TRANS PX 0303

UNITED CABLE 0030

ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926

CD PLAYER

AIWA 0184

ARCAM 0184

AUDIO RESEARCH 0184

AUDIO TON 0184

AUDIOLAB 0184

AUDIOMECA 0184

CAIRN 0184

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS

0056

CARVER 0184, 0206

CYRUS 0184

DKK 0027

DMX ELECTRONICS

0184

DENON 0900

DYNAMIC BASS 0206

EMERSON 0332

FISHER 0206

GENEXXA 0059, 0332

GOODMANS 0332

GRUNDIG 0184

HARMAN/KARDON

0184, 0200

HITACHI 0059

JVC 0099

KENWOOD 0055, 0064

KRELL 0184

LXI 0332

LINN 0184

MCS 0056

MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332

MARANTZ 0056, 0184

MATSUI 0184

MEMOREX 0332

MERIDIAN 0184

MICROMEGA 0184

MIRO 0027

MISSION 0184

MYRYAD 0184

NAD 0027

NSM 0184

NAIM 0184

OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064,

0206, 0332

PANASONIC 0056

PHILIPS 0184

PIONEER 0059, 0332

POLK AUDIO 0184

PROTON 0184

QED 0184

QUAD 0184

QUASAR 0056

RCA 0059, 0206, 0332

REALISTIC 0206

REVOX 0184

ROTEL 0184

SAE 0184

SANSUI 0184, 0332

SANYO 0206

SCOTT 0332

SEARS 0332

SHARP 0064

SIMAUDIO 0184

SONIC FRONTIERS 0184

SONY 0027

SYMPHONIC 0332

TAG MCLAREN 0184

TANDY 0059

TECHNICS 0056

THORENS 0184

THULE 0184

UNIVERSUM 0184

VICTOR 0099

WARDS 0184

YAMAHA 2300, 2301

CD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0653

MARANTZ 0653

PHILIPS 0653

YAMAHA 2400

DVD PLAYER

ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS

0757

ALBA 0744

AMSTRAD 0740

APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744,

0782, 0821, 0823,

0857, 1127

BLAUPINKT 0744

BLUE PARADE 0598

BUSH 0740

CENTREX 0699

CLATRONIC 0815

CYBERHOME 0741

DVD2000 0548

DAEWOO 0811, 0797

DANSAI 0797

DECCA 0797

DENON 0517

DIAMOND 0795

DIGITREX 0699

EMERSON 0618

ENTERPRISE 0618

FISHER 0697

GE 0549, 0744

GO VIDEO 0742

GOLDSTAR 0768

GRADIENTE 0678

GREENHILL 0744

GRUNDIG 0566

HITACHI 0600, 0691

HITEKER 0699

JVC 0585, 0650

KLH 0744

KENWOOD 0517, 0561

KOSS 0678

LG 0768

LIMIT 0795

MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702

MARANTZ 0566

MEMOREX 0858

MICO 0750

MICROSOFT 0549

MINTEK 0744

MITSUBISHI 0548

MUSTEK 0757

NESA 0744

ONKYO 0530

ORITRON 0678

PALSONIC 0699

PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389

PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673,

0881

PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658,

0659

POLK AUDIO 0566

PROSCAN 0549

QWESTAR 0678

RCA 0549, 0598, 0744

ROTEL 0650

SM ELECTRONIC 0757

SAMSUNG 0600

SANYO 0697

SHARP 0657

SHERWOOD 0797

SHINSONIC 0560

SLIM ART 0811

SONY 0560, 0891

SYLVANIA 0702

TATUNG 0797

TEAC 0598, 0744

TECHNICS 0517

THETA DIGITAL 0598

THOMSON 0549

TOSHIBA 0530

URBAN CONCEPTS 0530

XBOX 0549

YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572,

2100, 2101, 2102

ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768

ZEUS 0811

DVD RECORDER

PANASONIC 2800, 2801, 2802

PHILIPS 2808

PIONEER 2804, 2805, 2806

TOSHIBA 2803

YAMAHA 2807

LD PLAYER

CARVER 0091

DENON 0086

MARANTZ 0091

MITSUBISHI 0086

NAD 0086

NAGSMI 0086

OPTIMUS 0086

PHILIPS 0091

PIONEER 0086

SALORA 0091

SONY 0228

TELEFUNKEN 0086

YAMAHA 2200

MD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0708

ONKYO 0895

SHARP 0888

SONY 0517

YAMAHA 2500, 2501, 2502

RECEIVER (TUNER)

ADC 0558

AIWA 0185, 1116, 1415,

1432, 1668

ALCO 1417

ANAM 1636

APEX DIGITAL 1284

AUDIOLAB 1216

AUDIOTRONIC 1216

AUDIOVOX 1417

BOSE 1256

CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS

1397

CAPETRONIC 0558

CARVER 1116, 1216

CENTREX 1284

DENON 1387

FERGUSON 0558

FINE ARTS 1216

GRUNDIG 1216

HARMAN/KARDON

0137, 1331

INTEGRA 0162, 1325

JBL 0137, 1333

JVC 0101, 0558, 1401,

1522

KLH 1417, 1439

KENWOOD 1054, 1340

MCS 0066

MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,

1296,

MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216,

1316

MICROMEGA 1216

MUSICMAGIC 1116

MYRYAD 1216

NAD 0347

NORCENT 1416

ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325

OPTIMUS 0558, 1050

PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,

1790

PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293,

1295, 1296, 1310,

1316

PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050,

1411

POLK AUDIO 1316

PROSCAN 1281

QUASAR 0066

RCA 0558, 1050, 1281,

1417, 1636,

SABA 0558

SANSUI 1116

SCHNEIDER 0558

SONY 0185, 1085, 1185,

1685, 1785

STEREOPHONICS 1050

SUNFIRE 1340

TEAC 1417

TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336,

1545

TELEFUNKEN 0558

THOMSON 1281

THORENS 1216

UHER 0558

VENTURER 1417

VICTOR 0101

WARDS 0041, 0185

YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358,

2600, 2601, 2602,

2603

SATELLITE TUNER

@SAT 1327

ABSAT 0150

ALBA 0482

ALPHASTAR 0799

AMSTRAD 0874

ASTON 0169, 1156

ASTRO 0200

ATSAT 1327

AVALON 0423

BLAUPUNKT 0200

BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING

0874, 1202

CANAL DIGITAL 0880

CANAL SATELLITE 0880

CANAL+ 0880

CHAPARRAL 0243

CITYCOM 1203

CONNEXIONS 0423

CROSSDIGITAL 1136

CYRUS 0227

D-BOX 0750, 1154

DMT 1102

DNT 0227, 0423

DAERYUNG 0423

DAEWOO 1323

DIGENIUS 0326

DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593,

0666, 0751, 0776,

0846, 1103, 1136,

1169, 1776, 1883

DISH NETWORK SYSTEM

0802, 1032

DISHPRO 0802, 1032

DISTRATEL 0111

DREAM MULTIMEDIA

1264

ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,

0802, 0880, 0898,

1032, 1113

ENGEL 1044

EXPRESSVU 0802

FTE 0890

FINLUX 0482

FRACARRO 0898

FUBA 0423

GE 0593

GOI 0802

GALAXIS 0890, 1138

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0896

GOLD BOX 0880

GRUNDIG 0200, 0874

HTS 0802

HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423

HITACHI 0482, 0846

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM

0776, 1169, 1776

HUMAX 0890, 1203

INVIDEO 0898

JVC 0802

KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227,

0276, 0685, 1248

KREISELMEYER 0200

LABGEAR 1323

LOGIX 1044

LORENZEN 0326

MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751

MANHATTAN 0482, 1044,

1110

MARANTZ 0227

MEDIASAT 0880

MEMOREX 0751

METRONIC 0111

MITSUBISHI 0776

MOTOROLA 0896

MYRYAD 0227

NEXT LEVEL 0896

NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778,

1154, 1250, 1750

OCTALTV 1032

ORBITECH 1127

PACE 0482, 0874, 1202,

1350

PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,

1347

PANDA 0482

PAYSAT 0751

PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482,

0749, 0751, 0776,

0880, 1103, 1169,

1776

PIONEER 0880

PROMAX 0482

PROSCAN 0419, 0593

RCA 0170, 0419, 0593,

0882

RFT 0227

RADIOSHACK 0896

RADIOLA 0227

RADIX 0423

SKY 0874, 0883, 1202

SM ELECTRONIC 1227

SABRE 0482

SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280

SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303,

1319

SAT CONTROL 1327

SATSTATION 1110

SCHWAIGER 1138

SEEMANN 0423

SIEMENS 0200

SONY 0666, 0874, 1666

STAR CHOICE 0896

STRONG 1327

TPS 0847, 1280

TANTEC 0482

TECHNISAT 1126, 1127

TELESTAR 1127

THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073,

1318

TOPFIELD 1233

TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776

ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666

UNIDEN 0749, 0751

UNIVERSUM 0200

VENTANA 0227

WISI 0200, 0423, 0482

XSAT 0150

ZEHNDER 1102

ZENITH 0883, 1883

TAPE DECK

AIWA 0056

CARVER 0056

GRUNDIG 0056

HARMAN/KARDON

0056

MAGNAVOX 0056

MARANTZ 0056

MYRYAD 0056

OPTIMUS 0054

PHILIPS 0056

PIONEER 0054

POLK AUDIO 0056

RCA 0054

REVOX 0056

SANSUI 0056

SONY 0270

THORENS 0056

WARDS 0054

YAMAHA 2700,2701

AGB 0543

AOC 0036, 0057, 0087,

0119, 0120, 0135,

0205, 0207, 0478

ASA 0131

AWA 0036

ACURA 0036

ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680

ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490

ADVENT 0788

AIKO 0119

AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235,

0388, 0543, 0729,

0839

AKURA 0291

ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398,

0695

AMERICA ACTION 0207

AMPRO 0778

AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198,

0398, 0439, 0460,

0543

ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277

ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677

ANITECH 0036

APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792,

0794

AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136

BANG & OLUFSEN 0592

BASIC 0036

BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539

BAYSONIC 0207

BEAUMARK 0205

BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741,

0742

BELL & HOWELL 0181

BEON 0064

BLAUPUNKT 0222

BLUE SKY 0695, 1064

BONDSTEC 0274

BRADFORD 0207

BRANDT 0136, 0362

BROKSONIC 0263, 0490

BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398,

0401, 0695, 1064

CCE 0064

CGE 0274

CTC 0274

CXC 0207

CANDLE 0057

CARNIVALE 0057

CARVER 0081, 0197

CASCADE 0036

CATHAY 0064

CELEBRITY 0027

CELERA 0792

CENTURION 0064

CHANGHONG 0792

CHING TAI 0036, 0119

CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119,

0207

CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207

CIMLINE 0036

CINERAL 0119, 0478

CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119

CLARION 0207

CLARIVOX 0064

CLATRONIC 0274, 0397

CONDOR 0347, 0397

CONRAC 0835

iii

CONTEC 0036, 0207

CRAIG 0207

CROSLEY 0081

CROWN 0036, 0064, 0207,

0397, 0445

CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074,

0081, 0087, 0120,

0172, 0181, 0193,

0478, 0729, 1174,

1374

DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064,

0119, 0135, 0181,

0197, 0205, 0207,

0401, 0478, 0650,

0661, 1688

DANSAI 0064

DAYTON 0036

DE GRAAF 0235, 0575

DECCA 0064, 0543

DENON 0172

DIGATRON 0064

DIXI 0036, 0064

DUMONT 0044

DWIN 0747, 0801

ECE 0064

ELBE 0286

ELECTROBAND 0027

ELIN 0064, 0575

ELITE 0347

ELTA 0036

EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207,

0263, 0388, 0490,

0650

ENVISION 0057,0840

EPSON 0860

ERRES 0064

ETHER 0036, 0057

ETRON 0036

EUROPHON 0543

FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,

0265, 0314, 0362,

0587

FIDELITY 0388

FINLANDIA 0235, 0373

FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132,

0373, 0543

FIRSTAR 0036, 0263

FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695

FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235,

0397

FLINT 0482

FORMENTI 0064, 0347

FORTRESS 0120

FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291

FUJITSU 0710, 0836

FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291

FUTURETECH 0207

GE 0057, 0074, 0078,

0119, 0205, 0207,

0478, 0587, 1174,

1374, 1481

GEC 0064, 0543

GATEWAY 1782, 1783

GELOSO 0036

GENEXXA 0190

GIBRALTER 0044, 0057

GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,

0181, 0205, 0404

GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,

0661

GOREMJE 0397

GRADIENTE 0080, 0197

GRAETZ 0190, 0388

GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366,

0543

GRANDIN 0637

GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514,

0583, 0614

GRUNPY 0207

HCM 0036, 0439

HALLMARK 0205

HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207

HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,

0455, 0583

HANTAREX 0543

HARMAN/KARDON 0081

HARVARD 0207

HAVERMY 0120

HELLO KITTY 0478

HINARI 0036, 0064

HISAWA 0482

HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119,

0132, 0136, 0172,

0190, 0205, 0252,

0383, 0508, 0575,

0605, 1172, 1283

HUA TUN 0036

HUANYU 0401

HYPSON 0064, 0291

ICE 0291, 0398

ITS 0398

ITT 0190, 0388, 0575

IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445

INDIANA 0064

INFINITY 0081

INGELEN 0190

INNO HIT 0543

INNOVA 0064

INTEQ 0044

INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,

0388, 0539

INTERVISION 0064, 0291,

0404

JBL 0081

JCB 0027

JVC 0080, 0398, 0490,

0680, 0710

JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119,

0183, 0263

JENSEN 0788

KEC 0207

KTV 0057, 0207

KAISUI 0036

KAPSCH 0190

KARCHER 0637

KATHREIN 0583

KENDO 0064

KENWOOD 0057

KNEISSEL 0286, 0462

KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207

KORPEL 0064

KOYODA 0036

L&S ELECTRONIC 0835

LG 0057, 0064, 0087,

0135, 0205, 0741

LXI 0074, 0081, 0181,

0183, 0205

LEYCO 0064, 0291

LIESENK & TTER 0064

LOEWE 0539

LUXOR 0383, 0388

M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064,

0131, 0132, 0136,

0190, 0314, 0373,

0401, 0507

MGA 0057, 0177, 0205

MTC 0057, 0087, 0539

MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543

MAGNAFON 0543

MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,

1481

MANESTH 0291, 0347

MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081,

0583

MARK 0064

MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235,

0398, 0514, 0543

MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677

MEDIATOR 0064

MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064

MEGATRON 0172, 0205

MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181,

0205, 0277, 0490,

1064

METZ 0474

MICROMAXX 0835

MICROSTAR 0835

MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078

MINERVA 0514

MINOKA 0439

MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,

0177, 0181, 0205,

0207, 0263, 0277,

0539, 0863, 1277

MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543,

0636

MOTOROLA 0120

MULTITECH 0036, 0207

MYRYAD 0583

NAD 0183, 0205, 0388,

0893

NEC 0036, 0057, 0078,

0181, 0183, 0197,

0205, 0482, 0524,

1731

NEI 0064

NTC 0119

NECKERMANN 0064, 0583

NETSAT 0064

NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120,

0205

NIKKAI 0064, 0291

NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205

NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507,

0575, 0658

NORCENT 0775, 0851

NORDMENDE 0136, 0314,

0587

OCEANIC 0190, 0388

ONWA 0207, 0460

OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277,

0677

OPTONICA 0120

ORION 0064, 0263, 0347,

0490, 0543

OSAKI 0291, 0439

OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347,

0539, 0583

PALLADIUM 0397, 0445

PANAMA 0291

PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,

0190, 0277, 0677,

1437

PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347

PAUSA 0036

PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078,

0087, 0183, 0205,

1374

PERDIO 0347

PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081,

0172, 0205, 0207,

0274, 0490, 1688

PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064,

0078, 0081, 0119,

0135, 0205, 0401,

0583, 0717, 1481

PHONOLA 0064

PILOT 0057

PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193,

0314, 0706, 0787,

0893

PORTLAND 0119

PRANDONI-PRINCE

0543

PRIMA 0788

PRISM 0078

PROFEX 0036, 0388

PROSCAN 0074

PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274,

0291, 0445, 0695

PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205

PULSAR 0044

QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677

QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388,

0539

R-LINE 0064

RCA 0027, 0057, 0074,

0117, 0119, 0205,

0706, 1074, 1174,

1274, 1374, 1474,

1481, 1574

RFT 0455

RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074,

0181, 0205, 0207

RADIOLA 0064

RADIOMARELLI 0543

REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205,

0207

REDIFFUSION 0388

REOC 0741

REVOX 0064

REX 0190, 0286, 0291

ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445

RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524,

0630

SBR 0064

SEG 0291, 0695

SEI 0543

SKY 0064

SSS 0207

SABA 0136, 0190, 0314,

0362

SACCS 0265

SAGEM 0637

SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543

SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388,

0575

SAMBERS 0543

SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119,

0120, 0181, 0198,

0205, 0677, 1782

SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064,

0087, 0117, 0119,

0181, 0205, 0291,

0397, 0583, 0614,

0645, 0729, 0793,

0839, 0841

SANSEI 0478

SANSUI 0490

SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207,

0235, 0366, 0826

SCHAUB LORENZ 0388

SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,

0695

SCOTCH 0205

SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263

SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181,

0183, 0198, 0205

SELECO 0190, 0286

SEMIVOX 0207

SEMP 0183

SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677

SHEN YING 0036, 0119

SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263

SIAREM 0543

SIEMENS 0064, 0222

SINUDYNE 0543

SKANTIC 0383

SKYGIANT 0207

SKYWORTH 0064

SOLAVOX 0190

SONITRON 0235

SONOKO 0036, 0064

SONOLOR 0190, 0235

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0677, 0861,

1127, 1532, 1678

SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207

SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445

SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119,

0183, 0205

SQUAREVIEW 0198

STANDARD 0036

STARLITE 0207

STERN 0190, 0286

SUPREME 0027

SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198

SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207

SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119,

0120, 0205, 0478

SYSLINE 0064

T + A 0474

TCM 0835

TMK 0205

TNCI 0044

TVS 0490

TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205

TAI YI 0036

TANDY 0120, 0190

TASHIKO 0119, 0677

TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078,

0081, 0087, 0181,

0183, 0543

TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291,

0439, 0445, 0482,

0695, 1064

TEC 0274

TECHNEMA 0347

TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677

TECHWOOD 0078

TECO 0036, 0078, 0119,

0120, 0205, 0291,

0680

TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119,

0177, 0207

TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289,

0362, 0652, 0729

TELEMEISTER 0347

TELETECH 0036

TENSAI 0347

TERA 0057

THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587,

0652, 1474

THORN 0064, 0131, 0388,

0539

TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183,

0535, 0645, 0677,

0859, 1283, 1383,

1683, 1731

TRIUMPH 0543

TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119

UHER 0347

UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,

0291, 0373, 0397,

0519

VECTOR RESEARCH

0057

VESTEL 0064

VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677,

0680

VIDEOSAT 0274

VIDIKRON 0081

VIDTECH 0205

VIEWSONIC 1782

VISION 0347

VOXSON 0190

WALTHAM 0383

WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205,

0893

WATSON 0064, 0347

WAYCON 0183

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0064, 0347, 0490,

0650

YAMAHA 0057, 0796, 0860,

2900 (projector),

2901 (projector),

2902

YAPSHE 0277

YOKO 0064, 0291

ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205,

0490

VCR

ASA 0064, 0108

ADMIRAL 0075

ADVENTURA 0027

AIKO 0305

AIWA 0027, 0064, 0334,

0375, 0379

AKAI 0068, 0342

AKIBA 0099

ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342,

0379

AMERICA ACTION 0305

AMERICAN HIGH 0062

AMSTRAD 0027

ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267,

0305, 0507

ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589

ANITECH 0099

ASHA 0267

ASUKA 0064

AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305

BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131

BASIC LINE 0099, 0305

BEAUMARK 0267

BELL & HOWELL 0131

BLAUPUNKT 0253

BRANDT 0347

BRANDT ELECTRONIC

0068

BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506

BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379

CCE 0099, 0305

CGE 0027

CALIX 0064

CANON 0062

CARVER 0108

CIMLINE 0099

CINERAL 0305

CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305

COLT 0099

COMBITECH 0379

CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099,

0267

CROWN 0099, 0305

CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068,

0087, 1062

CYBERNEX 0267

CYRUS 0108

DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305,

0669, 1305

DANSAI 0099

DE GRAAF 0069

DECCA 0027, 0108

DENON 0069

DUAL 0068

DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131

DYNATECH 0027

ESC 0267, 0305

ELCATECH 0099

ELECTROHOME 0064

ELECTROPHONIC 0064

EMEREX 0059

EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064,

0070, 0072, 0211,

0267, 0305, 1305,

1506

FERGUSON 0068, 0347

FIDELITY 0027

FINLANDIA 0108, 0131

FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108,

0131

FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072,

0099

FISHER 0074, 0131

FUJI 0060, 0062

FUJITSU 0027, 0072

FUNAI 0027

GE 0062, 0087, 0267,

0834, 1062, 1087

GEC 0108

GARRARD 0027

GENERAL 0072

GO VIDEO 0459

GOLDHAND 0099

GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,

1264

GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,

0305

GRADIENTE 0027

GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267

GRANADA 0108, 0131

GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099

GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253,

0374

HCM 0099

HI-Q 0074

HANSEATIC 0064

HARLEY DAVIDSON

0027

HARMAN/KARDON 0108

HARWOOD 0099

HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379

HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068,

0069, 0267

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

0069

HYPSON 0099

ITT 0068, 0131, 0267

ITV 0064, 0305

IMPERIAL 0027

INTERFUNK 0108

JVC 0068, 0072, 0094

JENSEN 0068

KEC 0064, 0305

KLH 0099

KAISUI 0099

KENWOOD 0068, 0094

KODAK 0062, 0064

KOLIN 0068, 0070

KORPEL 0099

LG 0064, 0069, 0072,

0507

LXI 0064

LENCO 0305

LEYCO 0099

LLOYD’S 0027

LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589

LOGIK 0099, 0267

LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131

M ELECTRONIC 0027

MEI 0062

MGA 0070, 0267

MGN TECHNOLOGY

0267

MTC 0027, 0267

MAGNASONIC 1305

MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,

0108, 1808

MAGNIN 0267

MANESTH 0072, 0099

MARANTZ 0062, 0108

MARTA 0064

MATSUI 0375, 0379

MATSUSHITA 0062

MEDION 0375

MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064,

0066, 0074, 0075,

0131, 0267, 0334,

0375, 1264

MEMPHIS 0099

METZ 0064, 0374, 1589

MINOLTA 0069

MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,

0108, 0834

MOTOROLA 0062, 0075

MULTITECH 0027, 0099

MURPHY 0027

MYRYAD 0108

NAD 0131

NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075, 0094, 0131

NATIONAL 0253

NECKERMANN 0108

NESCO 0099

NEWAVE 0064

NIKKO 0064

NOBLEX 0267

NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267

NORDMENDE 0068, 0347

OCEANIC 0027, 0068

OKANO 0342, 0375

OLYMPUS 0062, 0253

OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,

0459

ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,

1506

OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099

OTTO VERSAND 0108

PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099

PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,

0643, 1062, 1589

PATHE MARCONI 0068

PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,

0267, 1062, 1264

PENTAX 0069

PERDIO 0027

PHILCO 0062

PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,

1108, 1208

PHONOLA 0108

PILOT 0064

PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108

POLK AUDIO 0108

PROFITRONIC 0267

PROLINE 0027

PROSCAN 0087, 1087

PROTEC 0099

PULSAR 0066

PYE 0108

QUASAR 0062, 1062

QUELLE 0108

RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,

0267, 0834, 1062,

1087

RADIOSHACK 0027

RADIOLA 0108

RADIX 0064

RANDEX 0064

REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,

0074, 0075, 0131

REOC 0375

REPLAYTV 0641, 0643

REX 0068

ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,

0305

RUNCO 0066

SBR 0108

SEG 0267

SEI 0108

STS 0069

SABA 0068, 0347

SALORA 0070

SAMPO 0064, 0075

SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459

SANKY 0066, 0075

SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,

1506

SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267

SAVILLE 0379

SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,

0131

SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108

SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211

SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,

0069, 0074, 0131,

1264

SELECO 0068

SEMP 0072

SHARP 0075, 0834

SHINTOM 0099, 0131

SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131

SILVA 0064

SINGER 0072, 0099

SINUDYNE 0108

SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,

0062, 0663, 1259

SUNKAI 0375

SUNSTAR 0027

SUNTRONIC 0027

SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,

0070, 1808

SYMPHONIC 0027

TMK 0267

TANDY 0027, 0131

TASHIKO 0027, 0064

TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,

0094, 0108

TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,

0334, 0669

TECHNICS 0062, 0253

TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075

TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064

TELEAVIA 0068

TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347

TENOSAL 0099

TENSAI 0027

THOMAS 0027

THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,

0347

THORN 0068, 0131

TIVO 0645, 0663

TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,

0094, 0108, 0872

TOTEVISION 0064, 0267

UHER 0267

UNITECH 0267

UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,

0267

VECTOR 0072

VICTOR 0068, 0094

VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072

VIDEOMAGIC 0064

VIDEOSONIC 0267

VILLAIN 0027

WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,

0074, 0075, 0087,

0099, 0108, 0267

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0099

XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099

YAMAHA 0068

YAMIS HI 0 09 9

YOKAN 0099

YOKO 0267

ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,

1506

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V4600

Printed in Malaysia WF09590

RX-V4600

AV R e c e i ve r

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V4600_U-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, March 16, 2005 10:08 AM

Documenttranscriptie

RX-V4600_U-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, March 16, 2005 10:08 AM U RX-V4600 RX-V4600 AV Receiver © 2005 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WF09590 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ii CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the AC power cable and disconnect the antenna cable when there is an electrical storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: General model .............AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz Asia model ................................AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. iii CONTENTS ADVANCED OPERATION FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................51 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote controls.................. 4 SYSTEM OPTIONS .............................................52 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 5 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 13 Speaker placement ................................................... 13 Speaker connections ................................................ 15 Before connecting components................................ 18 Connecting video components................................. 19 Connecting audio components................................. 22 Connecting the antennas .......................................... 24 Connecting the power cable..................................... 25 Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 26 Turning on the power............................................... 26 AUTO SETUP....................................................... 27 BASIC OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 33 TUNING ................................................................ 41 RECORDING ....................................................... 47 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS .............................................. 48 For movie/video sources.......................................... 48 For music sources .................................................... 50 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 ...................................................82 Zone 2/Zone 3 connections...................................... 82 Controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 from the front panel ..... 83 Controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 using the remote control................................................ 84 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS ..................86 Advanced setup menu.............................................. 86 Front panel display system options menu................ 87 USING i.LINK.......................................................91 What is i.LINK? ...................................................... 91 Connecting i.LINK components.............................. 91 Basic i.LINK operations .......................................... 92 Changing i.LINK Select parameters........................ 92 i.LINK display messages ......................................... 94 USING HDMI........................................................95 What is HDMI? ....................................................... 95 Connecting HDMI components............................... 96 Basic HDMI operations ........................................... 97 Changing HDMI parameters.................................... 97 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......99 What is a sound field? ............................................. 99 Changing parameter settings ................................... 99 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS.............................................100 TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................105 GLOSSARY.........................................................110 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 41 Presetting stations .................................................... 42 Selecting preset stations........................................... 44 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 44 Using HD Radio™ ................................................... 45 HD Radio™ tuning................................................... 45 Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs .................... 46 Displaying HD Radio™ information ....................... 46 Control area ............................................................. 70 Setting remote control codes ................................... 71 Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn) ....................................... 73 Changing source names in the display window....... 75 Using the Macro feature .......................................... 76 Clearing function sets .............................................. 78 Clearing individual functions .................................. 79 Controlling each component.................................... 81 ADVANCED OPERATION Basic operations....................................................... 33 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 34 Additional operations............................................... 35 Selecting audio input modes.................................... 40 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................70 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Introduction.............................................................. 27 Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 27 Starting the setup ..................................................... 28 Confirming the results ............................................. 30 Changing parameter settings ................................... 54 Input Select .............................................................. 55 Manual Setup (Sound) ............................................. 58 Manual Setup (Basic) .............................................. 61 Manual Setup (Option) ............................................ 66 System Memory....................................................... 69 BASIC OPERATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 18 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 51 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 5 Remote control........................................................... 7 Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control ................................... 9 Using the remote controls.......................................... 9 Front panel display .................................................. 10 Rear panel ................................................................ 12 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Audio formats ........................................................ 110 Sound field programs............................................. 111 Audio information ................................................. 111 Video signal information ....................................... 113 PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION .............................................114 SPECIFICATIONS.............................................115 1 FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ Minimum RMS Output Power (0.04% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω) Front: 130 W + 130 W Center: 130 W Surround: 130 W + 130 W Surround Back: 130 W + 130 W ◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ GUI (graphical user interface) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video system ◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ Short message function ◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog, DSD, PCM and multi-channel PCM sources ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video → component video) capability for monitor out ◆ i.LINK interface for direct digital transfer of digital audio signals ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening mode ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and learning/macro capability ◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility ◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control for controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 components connected to this unit Sound field features ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ THX Select2 ◆ SRS CS (U.S.A. model only) ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24 ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic / Dolby Pro Logic x decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ 40-station random access preset tuning Automatic preset tuning Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) HD Radio™ digital broadcast reception capability • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. “i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo Corporation. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. HD Radio™ technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. “iBiquity Digital” and the “HD Radio” and “HD” symbols are registered trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. 2 are trademarks of Sony “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. Circle Surround , Dialog Clarity, TruBass, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. Circle Surround , Dialog Clarity and TruBass technologies are incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. The THX logo is a trademark of THX Ltd. which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Please check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B AUDIO SELECT STANDBY POWER SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control POWER SELECT TUNER CD STANDBY CD-R AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE TV MUTE TV INPUT Batteries (4) (AAA, LR03) VCR 1 CBL/SAT MD/TAPE DVR/VCR2 Batteries (2) (AAA, R03) DVD MUTE PRESET TOP TV DTV EXIT TITLE MENU BAND PRG SELECT + PURE DIRECT PRESET/CH VOLUME – NIGHT A/B/C/D/E AUDIO ENTER MUTE A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN PRG SELECT DISPLAY DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 ID1 ID2 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME Power cable AM loop antenna (U.S.A. model) Speaker terminal wrench AM loop antenna (Canada, Asia, General, China, Korea, Australia, U.K. and Europe models) Optimizer microphone Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, Asia, General, China and Korea models) 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) Indoor FM antenna (Australia, U.K. and Europe models) 3 GETTING STARTED Installing batteries in the remote controls Notes on batteries • Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not flash, or its light or display window become dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. ■ Remote control ■ Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control 2 2 1 1 3 3 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, LR03) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 4 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert two supplied batteries (AAA, R03) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS INTRODUCTION Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E FM/AM MEMORY TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT EFFECT INPUT DVD DTV CBL/SAT STANDBY /ON VCR 1 SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A B SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 VIDEO L R AUDIO OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 F OPTIMIZER MIC G H PHONES I 1 STANDBY/ON Turns on the main unit only or sets it to the standby mode. When you turn on the main unit, there will be a 6 to 7 second delay before the main unit can reproduce sound. Notes • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. • You can turn on the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 or set them to the standby mode simultaneously using the remote control. For details, see page 85. 2 INPUT selector Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. 3 AUDIO SELECT Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack (AUTO, i.LINK, HDMI, COAX/OPT, ANALOG) when one component is connected to two or more input jacks on this unit (see page 40). 4 MULTI CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes priority over the source selected with the INPUT selector (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). 5 A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when the unit is in the tuner mode (see page 44). VIDEO/AUX J KL M N 6 PRESET/TUNING l / h Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the unit is in the tuner mode and the colon (:) is displayed next to the band indication in the front panel display. Selects the tuning frequency when the unit is in the tuner mode and the colon (:) is not displayed. See pages 41 to 44 for details. 7 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 8 PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting preset station numbers and tuning when the unit is in the tuner mode (see pages 41 to 44). 9 FM/AM Switches the reception band (FM or AM) when the unit is in the tuner mode (see page 41). 0 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory when the unit is in the tuner mode. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning (see pages 42 to 43). A TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) Switches the tuning mode between automatic (“AUTO” indicator on) and manual (“AUTO” indicator off) when the unit is in the tuner mode. 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS B STRAIGHT/EFFECT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. C Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote controls. D TONE CONTROL Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right and center channels (see page 35). E PURE DIRECT Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode. Lights up when turned on (see page 38). F REC OUT/ZONE 2 Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video recorder and ZONE 2 outputs independently of the source you are listening to or watching in the main room. When set to the SOURCE/REMOTE position, the input source is directed to all outputs. The source in Zone 2 and the source you record are always identical. L ZONE CONTROL Press to control the input or adjust the volume level for the currently selected zone (the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3) (see page 83). After you press ZONE CONTROL, the indicator for the currently selected zone flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing, perform the desired operation. M PROGRAM selector Use to select sound field programs or adjust bass/treble balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL). N VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. ■ Opening and closing the front panel door When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls. G OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see page 27). H SPEAKERS A/B Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. I PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the front left and right channels. J VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from an external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals at these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. K ZONE ON/OFF MAIN Turns on the power of the main unit or sets it to the standby mode (see page 83). ZONE 2 Turns on the power of Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode (see page 83). ZONE 3 Turns on the power of Zone 3 or sets it to the standby mode (see page 83). 6 To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control 1 2 3 C SYSTEM POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 4 SELECT AMP 5 6 + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE PRESET TOP EXIT TITLE MENU BAND PRG SELECT PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT 9 0 STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 H I J 9 0 L M N O P MOVIE A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. Q REC B OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE, then press TUNER to select the TUNER mode. 4 Display window Shows the name of the selected source component that you can control. 6 TOP, BAND Displays the top screen in the graphical user interface (GUI) menu on your video monitor when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP. Switches the reception band (FM or AM) when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in the tuner mode. 7 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h / ENTER Use to select and adjust DSP program parameters or GUI menu items when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP. Press l / h to select a preset station group (A to E) when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in the tuner mode. Press k / n to select a preset station number (1 to 8) when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in the tuner mode. 8 RETURN Returns to the upper directory when in the front panel display menu mode. DISC SKIP A 2 Transmission indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 5 LIGHT button Press to light up remote control buttons and display window. K A/B/C/D/E 8 G TV NIGHT 7 D E F 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. R S t 9 Sound field program / numeric buttons Use to select sound field programs or input numbers when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP. Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in the tuner mode. Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in multi-channel format (see page 37). Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 channel playback of multi-channel software (see page 36). 0 MEMORY 1/2 Use to recall favorite sound field programs, YPAO settings or additional preset stations (see page 69). A MACRO ON/OFF Turns the macro function on and off. 7 INTRODUCTION This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 70. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to operate this unit. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS B MACRO Use to program a series of operations for control by a single button (see page 76). O DISPLAY Use to enter into the front panel display menu mode when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP. C STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. (U.S.A. model only) Toggles between HD Radio information displays when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in the tuner mode (see page 46). D SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. E AUDIO SELECT Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack (AUTO, i.LINK, HDMI, COAX/OPT, ANALOG) when one component is connected to two or more input jacks on this unit (see page 40). F SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. G MULTI CH IN Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external decoder (etc.). H SELECT k / n Selects another component that you can control independently of the input component selected with the input selector buttons. I VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. J AMP/SOURCE/TV Selects the component you want to control with the remote control. AMP: Set to this position to operate this unit. SOURCE: Set to this position to operate the component selected with an input selector button. TV: Set to this position to operate the television. To set the remote control codes for components, see page 71. K MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. L PURE DIRECT Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 38). M EXIT, PRG SELECT Use to exit the graphical user interface (GUI) mode when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP. (U.S.A. model only) Selects the HD Radio audio program when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in the tuner mode (see page 46). N NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 38). 8 P STRAIGHT/EFFECT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. Q SPEAKERS A/B Use to turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP, then the corresponding button is pressed each time. R RE-NAME Used to change the input source name in the display window (see page 75). S CLEAR Used to clear functions acquired when using the learn, macro and rename features, or setting remote control codes (see page 78). T LEARN Used to set up the remote control code or program functions from other remote controls (see page 73). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control POWER TUNER CD DTV VCR 1 2 STANDBY CD-R 3 CBL/SAT MD/TAPE DVR/VCR2 4 DVD 5 + 6 VOLUME PRESET/CH 4 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. 5 PRESET/CH k / n Press k / n to select a preset station number (1 to 8) when the unit is in tuner mode. 6 VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. 7 MUTE Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. 8 A/B/C/D/E Press repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) when the unit is in tuner mode. – A/B/C/D/E 7 8 9 0 A B MUTE PRG SELECT DISPLAY ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ID1 ID2 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 POWER Turns on the power of this unit. 9 DISPLAY Use to enter into the front panel display menu mode. (U.S.A. model only) Toggles between HD Radio information displays when the unit is in the tuner mode (see page 46). 0 PRG SELECT (U.S.A. model only) Selects the HD Radio audio program when the unit is in the tuner mode (see page 46). A ID1/ID2 Slide to set the remote control AMP/tuner ID for this unit (see page 72). B ZONE 2/ZONE 3 Slide to set the operation of this unit to Zone 2 or Zone 3 (see page 82). 3 STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. Using the remote controls The remote controls transmit a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote controls directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT EFFECT INPUT SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE CD-R DTV CBL/SAT STANDBY /ON VCR 1 TUNER ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A B MAIN SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL DVR/ VCR2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC Approximately 6 m (20 ft) PHONES VIDEO/AUX 30 30 SYSTEM POWER TV POWER STANDBY ■ Handling the remote controls • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote controls. • Do not drop the remote controls. • Do not leave or store the remote controls in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – extremely low temperatures – dusty places POWER POWER AV TUNER A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DTV PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD VCR 1 CD CD-R STANDBY CBL/SAT MD/TAPE DVR/VCR2 DVD + PRESET/CH VOLUME – SELECT A/B/C/D/E MUTE PRG SELECT DISPLAY ID1 ID2 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 AMP + + + SOURCE TV VOL – CH VOL – – TV MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE PRESET TOP EXIT TITLE PURE DIRECT MENU PRG SELECT BAND NIGHT AUDIO ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO 1 ENTERTAIN 0 4 SELECT 6 EXTD SUR. 7 MEMORY 2 9 MOVIE 3 STANDARD 5 1 MUSIC 2 THX 8 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME 9 INTRODUCTION This section describes the controls and functions of the Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control. Use the Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control to control components connected to this unit in Zone 2 (the second room) or Zone 3 (the third room). 1 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display 1 2 3 MULTI CH 4 V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VIRTUAL 96 DISCRETE NIGHT 24 MATRIX STANDARD DIGITAL PL EX C CS PL PL x 5 6 VCR 1 SP AB CBL/SAT 7 DTV DVD MD/TAPE YPAO HiFi DSP SILENT CINEMA 90 CD-R CD TUNER B PHONO dB MUTE VOLUME ft mS dB D E F G HI J K L 2 HDMI indicator Lights up when an HDMI component is connected, and this unit is playing back audio signals input via HDMI connections. Flashes when an HDMI component is connected, but this unit is playing back audio signals input via connections other than HDMI or no audio signals are being input via HDMI connections. Turns off when no HDMI component is connected. See page 96 for details. 3 NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select night listening mode. 4 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 39). 5 Sound field indicators Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Left surround DSP sound field A AUTO STEREO HD MEMORY TUNED THX PCM ZONE2 ZONE3 DSD SLEEP 1 i.LINK indicator Lights up when an i.LINK component is connected, and this unit is playing back signals input via i.LINK connections. Flashes when an i.LINK component is connected, but this unit is playing back signals input via connections other than i.LINK or no signals are being input via i.LINK connections. Turns off when no i.LINK component is connected. See page 94 for details. Right surround DSP sound field Surround/surround back DSP sound field 6 Input source indicators A cursor lights to show the current input source. 7 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. 10 8 M N O P 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR QRS t U 8 YPAO indicator Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the auto setup speaker settings are used without any modifications. 9 AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 0 STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit. A HD Radio indicator (U.S.A. model only) Lights up when this unit is tuned into the HD Radio reception band. B VOLUME level indicator Indicates the volume level. C Decoder indicators When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective indicator lights up. D DSD indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (direct stream digital) digital audio signals. E PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. F SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. G ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 power is on. H THX indicator Lights up when a THX program is selected. I STANDARD indicator Lights up when a decoder is selected (see page 37). J Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS INTRODUCTION K SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected, or when bi-wiring. L SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 36). M Multi-information display Shows the current sound field program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. N HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program. O MEMORY indicator Flashes to show a station can be stored. P TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station. Q MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on. R 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. S LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal. T Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of current digital input signal. U Presence and surround back speaker indicators Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back speakers when using the Auto Setup setting (page 27) or Speaker Level setting (page 65). 11 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 1 2 3 4 5 VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL S VIDEO MD/TAPE AUDIO VIDEO 8 AUDIO L R 67 REMOTE L R 1 (PLAY) 0 A CONTROL OUT 2 1 2 AC IN IN (AUDIO) DVD TUNER IN OUT IN OUT +12V 15mA MAX. MD/TAPE CD-R FM ANT R DTV + – A – + – B – + – + L OUT S400 (REC) CD GND 75Ω UNBAL. RS-232C (PLAY) IN CBL/ SAT CENTER GND DVD 9 FRONT CD-R HDMI AM ANT IN + – + OUT (REC) VCR 1 DTV IN 1 CD OUT COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR CBL/SAT + – SURROUND L SURROUND DVR/VCR 2 L FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) DTV L R OUT SUBWOOFER CBL/ SAT – – + ZONE 3 OUTPUT SUBWOOFER L – L R MONITOR OUT + SINGLE (SB) MONITOR OUT DVR/VCR 2 + R ZONE 2 COAXIAL CENTER SURROUND OUT DVD R R IN 2 AC OUTLETS SWITCHED CLASS 2 WIRING L R IN CD SPEAKER IMPEDANCE FRONT PHONO DVD SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE SURROUND BACK PRE OUT SPEAKERS SINGLE PRESENCE/ZONE 2 CENTER MULTI CH INPUT DIGITAL INPUT (U.S.A. model) B C D E 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks See page 22 for details. 2 i.LINK connectors See page 91 for connection information. 3 Antenna terminals See page 24 for connection information. 4 Video component jacks See pages 19 and 21 for connection information. 5 Audio component jacks See page 22 for connection information. 6 Speaker terminal wrench hook Use to store the speaker terminal wrench when not in use. 7 RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only. Consult you dealer for details. 8 REMOTE 1/2 IN/OUT jacks See page 82 for details. 9 CONTROL OUT jacks These are control expansion terminals for factory use only. 12 F G H 0 AC OUTLETS Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 25). A AC INLET Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see page 25). B DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 19, 21 and 22 for details. C HDMI IN/OUT connectors See page 95 for connection information. D ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks See page 82 for details. E MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 20 for connection information. F PRE OUT jacks See page 23 for connection information. G Speaker terminals See page 15 for connection information. H PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals See page 15 for connection information. SPEAKER SETUP + SPEAKER SETUP Surround speakers (SR and SL) Speaker placement ITU-R* The speaker layout below shows the standard speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP, multi-channel audio sources and THX. The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL) * ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). PR C FR FL 30˚ Subwoofer SL SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SBL SR SBR More than 30 cm (12 in) The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. Presence speakers (PR and PL) 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 48). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 – 1 m (1 – 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Note Front speakers (FR and FL) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in the Sound menu (see page 61). Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. 13 PREPARATION PL The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in) apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as the front speakers. SPEAKER SETUP ■ Di-pole speaker layout Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please place the surround and surround back speakers according to the speaker layout below. FL FR C SL SR 30˚ 30˚ SBL SBR : Di-pole speaker : Direction of di-pole speaker 14 SPEAKER SETUP Speaker connections 5 Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Speaker terminal wrench 5 4 3 CAUTION • If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see page 26). If you will use 8 ohm speakers, use this unit’s initial setting for speaker impedance. • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is disconnected from the power source. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. ■ Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or PRESENCE speaker terminals A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 1 Open the tab. 2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. 1 2 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8 in) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 3 Loosen the knob. The supplied speaker terminal wrench is useful for loosening or tightening knobs. 4 1 PREPARATION 10 mm (3/8 in) Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 2 ■ Banana plug connections (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) y You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs. 15 SPEAKER SETUP 9 10 4 2 1 7 3 8 6 5 Front speakers (A) Right Left Speaker layout Subwoofer with built-in amplifier Center speaker 1 2 R 3 + – A – + – B – + – + Front speakers (B) 4 L CENTER FRONT + – + SPEAKER IMPEDANCE FRONT CLASS 2 WIRING L R R + – SURROUND L SURROUND L R L R SUBWOOFER CENTER + R + – – + L SINGLE (SB) – L R SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE SURROUND BACK PRE OUT SPEAKERS SINGLE PRESENCE/ZONE 2 (U.S.A. model) 7 8 Right Left Surround speakers 5 6 Right Left Surround back speakers 9 10 Right Left Presence speakers • You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in the Sound menu (see page 61). • The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only operate when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES or Dolby Pro Logic x decoder is turned on. • The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields are selected. 16 SPEAKER SETUP ■ FRONT terminals Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the FRONT A or B terminals. Note The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems simultaneously. PREPARATION Bi-wired connection The unit also allows you to make bi-wired connections to one speaker system. Use two pairs of speaker cables for each speaker (one pair for the woofer and one pair for the tweeter/mid-range). To use the bi-wired connections, press SPEAKERS A and SPEAKERS B on the front panel so that both SP A and B light up on the front panel display. Bi-wired connection + – A – + FRONT + – B – + R L This unit ■ CENTER terminals Connect a center speaker to these terminals. ■ SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers to these terminals. ■ SUBWOOFER jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. ■ SURROUND BACK terminals Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the left (L) terminals. ■ PRESENCE terminals Connect presence speakers to these terminals. Note You can also use these terminals to connect Zone 2 speakers (see page 83). 17 CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Before connecting components CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are complete. ■ Cable indications ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor. The signals input at the S VIDEO jacks on this unit are automatically converted for output at the VIDEO jacks. When “Video Conv.” is set to “On” (see page 66), signals input at the VIDEO jacks can be output at the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Likewise, signals input at the S VIDEO jacks can also be output at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. For analog signals left analog cables L right analog cables R For digital signals optical cables O coaxial cables C For video signals video cables V S-video cables S V V ■ Analog jacks V You can input analog signals from audio components by connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. ■ Digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y VIDEO jack For conventional composite video signals. S VIDEO jack For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color reproduction. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in picture reproduction. Signal flow inside this unit Input Output (MONITOR OUT) COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO Only when “Video Conv.” is set to “On” (see page 66) Note Note This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input at the analog jacks are only output at the analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input at the digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. 18 When signals are input at both the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input at the S VIDEO jack have priority. CONNECTIONS Connecting video components ■ Connections for DVD playback Coaxial out Audio out Optical out Video out R O VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL S VIDEO PREPARATION C DVD player L AUDIO VIDEO R L DVD Video monitor DVD Video in COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR DVD DVD MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT COAXIAL OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT (U.S.A. model) 19 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. If you set Multi CH Assign: Input Channels to 8ch (see page 57), you can use input jacks assigned as Multi CH Assign: Front Input (page 57) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8 channels. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) AUDIO R AUDIO L R L (PLAY) IN DVD SURROUND SURROUND MD/TAPE DTV OUT (REC) (PLAY) SUBWOOFER CENTER SUBWOOFER CENTER MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH INPUT CBL/ SAT IN CD-R IN OUT (REC) R L Subwoofer out R L R L VCR 1 R L OUT Center out Center out Multi-format player/ Front External decoder Surround out out Subwoofer out CD IN DVR/VCR 2 Surround back out Multi-format player/ Surround out R External decoder L Front out Notes • When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output. 20 CONNECTIONS ■ Connections for other video components Optical out Audio out Cable TV or satellite tuner Video out O VIDEO S VIDEO L R L AUDIO VIDEO R L PREPARATION DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL R CBL/ SAT IN VCR 1 OUT COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR CBL/SAT DTV CBL/ SAT DVR/VCR 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT (U.S.A. model) R C Audio in Video in Video out L DVD recorder or VCR Audio out Coaxial out ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or video camera, to this unit. S VIDEO VIDEO S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O VIDEO/AUX L Optical out Audio out R Audio out L Video out Game console or video camera S-video out 21 CONNECTIONS Connecting audio components ■ Connections for audio components O Optical in Optical in MD recorder or tape deck CD recorder Audio in O Audio out R L R Audio out L Audio in R L R L AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL R MD/TAPE L (PLAY) IN MD/TAPE CD-R OUT (REC) GND CD (PLAY) IN CD-R OUT (REC) CD PHONO CD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT (U.S.A. model) R L R L Audio out Optical out Audio out O Coaxial out CD player GND C Turntable ■ Connecting a turntable PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. 22 y Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to an external amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows. Notes If you have a component with an i.LINK connector, you can enjoy digital audio from CD, DVD, Super Audio CD and DVD-A discs. For details on i.LINK, see “USING i.LINK” on page 91. DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL i.LINK component (AUDIO) S400 Note An i.LINK cable shorter than 3.5 m is recommended. 1 2 ■ Connecting HDMI components FRONT L R SURROUND L R SUBWOOFER CENTER 5 3 4 SINGLE (SB) L R SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel line output jacks. 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel line output jacks. 3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. This unit has the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks for signal input as well as the HDMI OUT jack for signal output. Connect the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit to the HDMI OUT jack of other HDMI-compatible components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN jack of other HDMI-compatible components (such as TV and a projector). For details on HDMI, see “USING HDMI” on page 95. HDMI DVD Player IN 1 HDMI OUT DVD Player IN 2 D HDMI OUT Video monitor Notes • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals output at SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks may not correspond to the correct speakers. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. • Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the Speaker Set settings (see page 62). C S OUT 4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. If you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the left (L) jack. 5 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel line output jack. CBL/SAT HDMI IN DVR/VCR 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT Note An HDMI cable shorter than 5 m with the HDMI logo printed on it is recommended. 23 PREPARATION • When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum. • The signal output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings. • If SPEAKERS A is turned off and Multi Zone: Speaker B is set to “Zone B” (see page 67), signals will only be output at the FRONT PRE OUT jacks. ■ Connecting i.LINK components CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. Indoor FM antenna (included) 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. AM loop antenna (included) Notes TUNER FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. GND AM ANT (U.S.A. model) • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. ■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 1 Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. 2 Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. Set up the AM loop antenna. 3 4 2 24 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Cut the lead wire and remove it. Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. Lead wire Clamp Insert the wire into the slot Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 5 Unit: mm (in) Snap the cover into place. Clamp CONNECTIONS Connecting the power cable ■ Connecting the AC power cable AC IN Plug the power cable into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the power cable to an AC wall outlet. CAUTION AC OUTLETS Do not use other AC power cables. Use the provided cable. Use of other power cables may result in fire hazard or electrical shock. SWITCHED (U.S.A. model) VOLTAGE SELECTOR U.K. and Australia models ..................................... 1 outlet Korea model ............................................................... None Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets Use these outlets to connect the power cables from your other components to this unit. Power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is: Asia and General models .......................................... 50 W Other models ...........................................................100 W ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) VOLTAGE SELECTOR The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: General model .......AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz Asia model ...........................AC 220/230–240V, 50/60 Hz ■ Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. (Asia and General models) 25 PREPARATION ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) CONNECTIONS Speaker impedance setting Follow the procedure below to change the impedance setting for all speakers. Turning on the power When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. 1 CAUTION If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to 6 ohms before using this unit. PURE DIRECT Be sure this unit is in the standby mode. VOLUME AUDIO SELECT 1 MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT EFFECT INPUT On the front panel, while holding down STRAIGHT/EFFECT, press STANDBY/ON. “SP IMP.–8ΩMIN” appears on the front panel display. DVD DTV CBL/SAT STANDBY /ON VCR 1 ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A TUNER B SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 VIDEO L R AUDIO OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO/AUX SYSTEM STRAIGHT POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY /ON EFFECT STANDBY POWER A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 1 SELECT SP IMP.-8 MIN 2 Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to select the impedance of your speakers. If you are using 6 ohm speakers, select 6 ohms; if you are using 8 ohm speakers, select 8 ohms. AMP + 1 + + Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on the remote controls) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM POWER 3 STANDBY /ON Press STANDBY/ON to exit the setting. This unit will be set to the standby mode. Front panel or Remote control Note Speaker impedance setting function is located in the Advanced menu (see page 86). 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Note Press STANDBY/ON again (or STANDBY on the remote control) to enter the standby mode. 26 AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP Introduction 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E FM/AM Notes CBL/SAT VCR 1 TUNER MEMORY ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE CD-R DTV TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL PREPARATION This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Optimizer microphone setup EFFECT ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A B SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 VIDEO L R AUDIO OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 • Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the auto setup procedure. • If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen, follow the troubleshooting on page 31. YPAO performs the following checks and makes appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible sound from your system. Wiring Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. Distance Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. Size Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel. Equalizing Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room with unique sonic characteristics. YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics. REC OUT/ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO/AUX Notes • After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep it away from direct sunlight. – Do not place it on top of this unit. 2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone head upward, at your normal listening position. If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer mic at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. Optimizer microphone position Level Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each speaker. 27 AUTO SETUP Starting the setup 4 For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. Press k / n repeatedly to select Setup Menu, then press h. y Information If your subwoofer has adjustable volume and crossover/high cut frequency controls, set the volume between 9 and 11 o’clock (as viewed on a conventional clockface) and set the crossover/high cut frequency to the maximum. Setup Menu Wiring Setup Type Distance Start Size CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME 5 MIN MAX MIN MAX Press k / n repeatedly to select Wiring, Distance, Size, Equalizing or Level, then press h. Subwoofer 1 2 Wiring Switch on this unit and video monitor. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. The top display appears. Skip Wiring Skip Check Distance Check Distance Size Size Equalizing Wiring Distance Distance Skip Size Skip Size Check Equalizing Check: Natural Level Check: Flat Equalizing Check: Front Level AMP TOP TITLE SOURCE Size TV Equalizing Skip Level Check y Stereo/Surround Input Select Sound Manual Setup Basic Auto Setup Option Equalizing is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 87). 6 For Wiring, Distance, Size or Level, select: System Memory Check Skip 3 Press k / n repeatedly to select Auto Setup, then press h. PRESET ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E Input Select 28 Manual Setup Information Auto Setup Setup Menu System Memory Setup Type Audio Info. Start y When using THX speakers, select “Skip” for Size and make sure that “Small” or “Small x2” is selected in Speaker Set (page 62) and that “80Hz” is selected in Bass Cross Over (page 63). PRESET ENTER To automatically check and adjust the selected item. To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. AUTO SETUP For Equalizing, press k / n to select: Skip 9 Press n to select Start, then press ENTER. Loud test tones are output from each speaker and “Measuring” appears during the auto setup procedure. Setup Menu Setup Type Start Start:ENTER y 7 Once you have selected the desired setting, press l to move back to Setup Menu. Information 8 Setup Menu Wiring Setup Type Distance Start Size • To stop the auto setup procedure, press one of the cursor buttons (k / n / l / h) or ENTER. In the pause mode, press k to retry the procedure, l to cancel auto setup. • If an error message appears during testing, refer to “Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on page 31, and after carrying out the remedy, retry the auto setup procedure. • This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 87). Press n to select Setup Type, then select: Auto To automatically perform the entire auto setup procedure. To pause for confirmation between each check in the auto setup procedure. Step Information Setup Menu Setup Type Auto Start Step y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 87). 29 PREPARATION To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. Check: Natural To average out the frequency response of all speakers with higher frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended if the “Flat” setting sounds a little harsh. Check: Flat To average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. Check: Front To adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. AUTO SETUP Confirming the results If you set Setup Type to “Step” The results are displayed individually after each analysis. You can confirm the results of each analysis. Distance If you set Setup Type to “Auto” Size The results are displayed after all items have been analyzed. Equalizing Exit Retry Detail Next Level Result Setup Menu Setup Type Start Retry Exit Detail Setup • Press n and select Next to start measurement of the next menu item. • Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure. • Press h and select Detail to view information about measurement results and warning messages. For more details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on page 31. • Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes. To cancel the settings and exit, select No. Measurement Over Successfully • Press n and select Setup to set the measured values. • Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure. • Press h and select Detail to view information about measurement results and warning messages. For more details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on page 31. • Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes. To cancel the settings and exit, select No. After all menu items have been measured, “Measurement Over” appears on the screen and the results for each item are displayed. • Press n and select Setup to set the measured values. • Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure. • Press h and select Detail to view information about measurement results and warning messages. For more details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on page 31. • Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes. To cancel the settings and exit, select No. y If you want to make more detailed settings, change the system parameters using the Manual Setup menu. If you want to return to the Auto Setup settings after making settings in the Manual Setup menu, navigate to the Information screen in the Auto Setup menu, press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust, then press ENTER. Notes • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, perform auto setup again to re-calibrate your system. • Depending on your listening environment, SubWfr:REV may appear in the Wiring results. In this case, SWFR Phase in the Manual Setup menu (see page 64) is automatically set to Reverse. To select the desired setting, change the SWFR Phase parameter in the Manual Setup menu. • In the Distance results, the distance displayed may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. This may also be the case when using an external amplifier. • In the Equalizing results, different values may be set for the same band to provide finer adjustments. 30 AUTO SETUP ■ Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure Before auto setup Error message Cause Remedy Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug Phones! Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones. No Setup Menu! No setup menu items have been selected. • Select at least one setup menu item. Memory Guard! This setting is protected. • Remove the protection setting for auto setup (see page 68). Error message Cause Remedy E01:No Front SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not detected. • Select the front speakers by pressing SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or by setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then pressing SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control). • Check the front L/R speaker connections. E02:No Sur. SP Only one surround channel signal is detected. • Check the surround speaker connections. E03:No Pres. SP Only one presence channel signal is detected. • Check the presence speaker connections. E04:SBR ->SBL Only the surround back right channel signal is detected. • Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. E05:Noisy Background noise is too loud. • Try auto setup in a quiet environment. • Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners, or move them away from this unit. E06:Check Sur. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. • Connect surround speakers when using (a) surround back speaker(s). E07:No MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the auto setup procedure. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. E08:No Signal The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. • Check the microphone setting. • Check the speaker connections and placement. E09:User Cancel The auto setup procedure was cancelled because a setting that affects auto setup (such as changing speaker settings, etc.) was changed during the procedure. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. E10:Internal Err An internal error occurred. • Restart this unit, then try the auto setup procedure again. 31 PREPARATION During auto setup Press l / h to display detailed information for individual errors. Select Retry to try the auto setup procedure again. AUTO SETUP After auto setup The following warning messages are displayed after analysis is complete to inform you of possible problems. We recommend that you check the contents of each message, then select Retry to try the auto setup procedure again. Warning message Cause Remedy W1:Out of Phase Speaker polarity is incorrect. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when they are connected correctly. • Check the speaker connections. W2:Over Distance The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). • Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. W3:Level Error The difference in volume level between the speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) • • • • W4:SP Mismatch The speaker settings differ from the measurement results of wiring (only occurs when the wiring measurement procedure is skipped). • Check the speaker connections. 32 Readjust the speaker installation. Check the speaker connections. Use speakers of similar quality. Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. PLAYBACK PLAYBACK Basic operations 3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or press SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control). Each press turns the respective speakers on or off. PURE DIRECT SPEAKERS MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT A TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE A SPEAKERS B +10 or VOLUME AUDIO SELECT ENT. B EFFECT INPUT VCR 1 ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM TUNER CBL/SAT STANDBY /ON ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE CD-R DTV A B MAIN SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO Front panel OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES Remote control VIDEO/AUX When bi-wiring, select both A and B. 1 4 7 3 1 SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER U U TOP PRESET 4 6 U EXIT TITLE MENU BAND PRG SELECT PURE DIRECT Select the input source. Use the INPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input you desire. B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R AUDIO ENTER PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX DTV CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD BASIC OPERATION NIGHT A PHONO INPUT A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN 4 or EFFECT DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 DVD THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 SELECT 6 DISPLAY STEREO AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TOP PRESET EXIT 1 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. 7 3 Front panel REC Remote control DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO TV LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME The current input source name appears in the front panel display and video monitor for a few seconds. PURE DIRECT V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER PHONO SP A 1 dB VOLUME DVD Press STANDBY/ON (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. L R Selected input source 5 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. See page 41 for details about tuning instructions. 6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. STANDBY /ON Front panel or AMP SYSTEM POWER SOURCE VOLUME + TV or Remote control 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. VOL – Front panel Remote control 33 PLAYBACK 7 Select a sound field program if desired. Use PROGRAM (or press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field program. See page 48 for details about sound field programs. Selecting sound field programs ■ Front panel operation PURE DIRECT PROGRAM STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 VOLUME or AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL EFFECT INPUT DVD DTV A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. CBL/SAT VCR 1 STANDBY /ON ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A TUNER B SILENT CINEMA CD REC OUT/ZONE 2 Front panel ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R S VIDEO MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 VIDEO L R AUDIO OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO/AUX Remote control PROGRAM Note When this unit detects Dolby Digital signals, the following display appears for a few seconds. This shows how the signal level is being corrected to become –27 dB (THX recommendation).3 Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display and video monitor. PROGRAM DialNorm;;+4dB V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 SP A CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER Hall in Munich Program name 34 PHONO HiFi DSP dB VOLUME L R PLAYBACK ■ Remote control operation Additional operations AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE PRESET TOP EXIT TITLE ■ To adjust the tone AMP/SOURCE/TV SOURCE TV PRG SELECT BAND NIGHT AUDIO ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 MOVIE Sound field program buttons PROGRAM A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display and video monitor. AMP SOURCE V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 SP A CBL/SAT DTV STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 DVD MD/TAPE MOVIE Notes A SPEAKERS B +10 CD-R ENT. CD TUNER PHONO HiFi DSP Hall in Munich dB VOLUME L R Program name y Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with that source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front left/right and center speakers. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (page 48) or PURE DIRECT (page 38) is selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • If headphones are connected to this unit, the Tone Control setting adjusts the bass/treble balance of your headphones (see page 60). ■ To mute the sound Press MUTE on the remote control. The MUTE indicator flashes on the front panel display. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again (or press VOL –/+). The MUTE indicator disappears from the display. MUTE y You can adjust the muting level (see page 60). 35 BASIC OPERATION TV You can adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right and center channels. Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly on the front panel to select TREBLE or BASS. Select TREBLE, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease the highfrequency response. Select BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease the low-frequency response. To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select BYPASS. TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT MENU PLAYBACK ■ To listen with headphones (“SILENT CINEMA”) ■ Enjoying multi-channel software in 6.1/7.1 channel surround “SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in the front panel display. If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic x, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1 channel playback. EXTD SUR. Notes 8 • This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. • “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or a 2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode. ■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display and video monitor. MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH IN or Front panel Remote control Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and/or the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select another input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or one of the input selector buttons on the remote control), press MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor. To select a decoder, press l / h repeatedly when PL xMovie (etc.) is displayed. Auto (AUTO) When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/7.1 channels. Decoders (select with l / h) You can select from the following modes depending on the format of the software you are playing. PLIIxMovie For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic x movie decoder. PLIIxMusic For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic x music decoder. EX/ES For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the DTS-ES decoder. EX For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. Off (OFF) For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1 channels. y When Surround Back is set to “Large x1” or “Small x1” (see page 63), the surround back channel will output from the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. 36 PLAYBACK When you select the SUR. STANDARD program Notes • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag) which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select decoders (PL xMovie, PL xMusic, EX/ES or EX) manually. • 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD SUR. is pressed in the following cases: – When Surround or Surround Back is set to “None” (see page 63). – When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is being played. – When the source being played does not contain surround L/R channel signals. – When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – When 2ch Stereo, 7ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected. • When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be reset to AUTO. • The Pro Logic x decoder is not available when Surround Back is set to “None” (see page 63). • “PL xMovie” cannot be selected when Surround Back is set to “Large x1” or “Small x1” (see page 63). Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multiple channels. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press STANDARD on the remote control to switch between the SUR. STANDARD and SUR. ENHANCED programs. 6 Or press MOVIE or THX on the remote control to select the MOVIE THEATER or THX programs. THX 4 or <PLIIx Music> Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software. <PLIIx Game> Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software. <Neo:6 Cinema> DTS processing for movie software. <Neo:6 Music> DTS processing for music software. <CS II Cinema>* SRS Circle Surround processing for movie software. <CS II Music>* SRS Circle Surround processing for music software. * (U.S.A. model only) When you select the SUR. ENHANCED, MOVIE THEATER or THX programs <PRO LOGIC> Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. <PLIIx Movie> Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software. STANDARD MOVIE <PLIIx Movie> Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software. 5 Press SELECT on the remote control to select the decoder. SELECT 7 <Neo:6 Cinema> DTS processing for movie software. y • You can also select a decoder with the Decode Type parameter in the Stereo/Surround menu (see page 99). • You can also select a decoder by pressing l / h on the remote control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message display. Note The Pro Logic x decoder is not available when Surround Back is set to “None” (see page 63). You can select from the following modes depending on the type of software you are playing and your personal preference. 37 BASIC OPERATION ■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround <PRO LOGIC> Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. PLAYBACK ■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound (PURE DIRECT) PURE DIRECT bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP processors as well as shuts down the video circuitry, allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound fidelity from analog and PCM sources. Press PURE DIRECT to activate pure direct. The button lights up and the front panel display automatically goes out. PURE DIRECT ■ Night listening modes The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the type of material you are playing. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select cinema or music. When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in the front panel display lights up. PURE DIRECT NIGHT or Front panel AUDIO Remote control y The front panel display switches on momentarily when an operation is performed. To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again. The indicator around the front panel button goes out and the previous settings are restored. Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in this mode. • When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be heard.) • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • Tone Control (page 35) and GUI menu (page 52) settings are not effective. • The following operations are not possible during PURE DIRECT operation: – switching the sound field program – displaying the short message – adjusting GUI menu parameters – all video functions (video conversion etc.) • PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is set to the standby mode. Remote control • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select NIGHT:OFF if you do not want to use this function. Press l / h to adjust the effect level while NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed. This adjusts the level of compression. PRESET ENTER A/B/C/D/E Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. y NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT, MULTI CH INPUT, or when headphones are connected (even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE DIRECT is selected). • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. 38 PLAYBACK ■ Downmixing to 2 channels You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multichannel sources. Rotate PROGRAM (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch Stereo. PROGRAM STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX or Front panel STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine images from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Use the input selector buttons to select a video source, then select an audio source. Audio sources A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. Remote control PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Video sources 2ch Stereo Note Note You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or BOTH is selected in LFE/BASS OUT. In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select STRAIGHT. STRAIGHT STRAIGHT or EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the display when you want to turn the sound effect back on. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field. If you set Surround to None, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when Surround is set to “None” (see page 62) in the following cases: – When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. – When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. 39 BASIC OPERATION ■ Listening to unprocessed input signals If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT. PLAYBACK ■ Displaying information about the input source Selecting audio input modes This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can select the type of input signal you want to use as follows. Press AUDIO SELECT to select an input mode. In most cases, use AUTO. You can display the type, format and sampling frequency of the current input signal. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. The top display appears. SYSTEM AUDIO SELECT or POWER POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER AUDIO SELECT SLEEP AMP TOP TITLE SOURCE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN TV Front panel Remote control Stereo/Surround V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE SP A A.SEL: AUTO CD–R CD TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME L R Input mode Automatically selects input signals in the following order: 1) i.LINK 2) HDMI 3) Digital signals* 4) Analog signals i.LINK Selects only i.LINK signals. If no i.LINK signals are input, no sound is output. HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. If no HDMI signals are input, no sound is output. COAX/OPT Selects digital signals input at the OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks. Use if i.LINK or HDMI signals are also being input. ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. Input Select Sound Manual Setup Basic Auto Setup Option System Memory AUTO 2 Auto Setup System Memory Audio Info. Format y • You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the power is turned on (see page 56). • DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD encoded in DTS. Note 40 Format Sampling Channel Bitrate Dialogue Flag1 Flag2 Analog --2/0/----------- Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a digital signal it automatically switches to analog input. Sampling Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to detect the sampling frequency “?” appears. Channel Number of source channels in the input signal. For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. Bitrate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate “– – –” appears. Dialogue Dialogue normalization information for Dolby Digital signals. Flag1/Flag2 Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby Digital signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. * If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program. If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. Press n repeatedly to select Audio Info. The following information appears in the display. 3 Press EXIT. TUNING TUNING Automatic and manual tuning 4 There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. ■ Automatic tuning Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l to tune into a lower frequency. PRESET/ TUNING 2 VCR 1 A VOLUME MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT EFFECT INPUT DVD DTV CBL/SAT VCR 1 STANDBY /ON SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A B SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 VIDEO L R AUDIO 1 OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES 43 2 3 AM 1530 kHz Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 as described in “Automatic tuning”. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. AUTO TUNING MODE Disappears AUTO/MAN'L If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. FM/AM or PRESET/ TUNING Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator lights up on the front panel display. EDIT 3 AUTO TUNING MODE Lights up AUTO/MAN'L SP A EDIT A CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R A CD TU AUTO SP A AM 630 kHz Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue searching. PRESET/ TUNING If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. VCR 1 TU TUNED 1 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. 2 CD AUTO BASIC OPERATION Rotate the INPUT selector to select TUNER as the input source. PRESET/ TUNING CD-R If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. Front panel 3 MD/TAPE HiFi DSP ■ Manual tuning VIDEO/AUX INPUT 2 DVD OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 1 ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS CD DTV When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. PURE DIRECT AUDIO SELECT CBL/SAT SP A TU AUTO AM 630 kHz 41 TUNING Notes Presetting stations ■ Automatically presetting FM stations You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. Automatic preset tuning options PURE DIRECT You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT EFFECT INPUT DVD DTV CBL/SAT VCR 1 STANDBY /ON ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A TUNER B SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 VIDEO L R AUDIO OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO/AUX 1 32 1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator lights up on the front panel display. AUTO TUNING MODE Lights up AUTO/MAN'L 3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the frequency currently displayed and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 SP A CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER PHONO AUTO MEMORY A1:FM 87.5 MHz dB VOLUME L R When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. 42 • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations”. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) manually. 4 PURE DIRECT Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY PRESET/ TUNING TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT EFFECT INPUT VCR 1 B MAIN SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES 3 1 ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A TUNER CBL/SAT STANDBY /ON ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VIDEO/AUX 4 2,5 V-AUX DVR/VCR2 CBL/SAT VCR 1 DTV DVD MD/TAPE 5 CD-R CD TUNER PHONO TUNED dB VOLUME 630 kHz L R When tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. CD-R CD TUNER PHONO MEMORY TUNED dB VOLUME 630 kHz L R Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV SP A C3:AM MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER PHONO TUNED 630 kHz dB VOLUME L R Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. Flashes 6 3 MD/TAPE DVD Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display. Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. A/B/C/D/E V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV SP A C :AM DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER PHONO MEMORY TUNED 630 kHz dB VOLUME L R Preset group 43 BASIC OPERATION 2 DTV C3:AM SP A A :AM CBL/SAT VCR 1 SP A Tune into a station. See page 41 for tuning instructions. V-AUX DVR/VCR2 TUNING Selecting preset stations Exchanging preset stations You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT VOLUME EFFECT INPUT DVD DTV ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A TUNER VCR 1 ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT STANDBY /ON B SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 VIDEO L R AUDIO AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO/AUX VCR 1 2 TOP TUNER CD TV INPUT PRESET TITLE MULTI CH IN CBL/SAT MD/TAPE 1 CD-R PURE DIRECT MENU AUDIO 3 STRAIGHT DVD DISPLAY Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE, then press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. A/B/C/D/E or ENTER Front panel PRESET/ TUNING 3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or PRESET k / n on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 through 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the TUNED indicator lights up. Remote control Front panel DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER TUNED E1:FM 87.5 MHz DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER MEMORY TUNED DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE SP A CD-R CD TUNER 4 PHONO MEMORY TUNED dB VOLUME A5:FM 90.6 MHz L R Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. ENTER A/B/C/D/E DTV E1:FM 87.5 MHz V-AUX PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/ TUNING CBL/SAT VCR 1 Select preset station “A5” by using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. Remote control or /VCR2 SP A PRESET 44 OPTICAL Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. EDIT A/B/C/D/E CBL/SAT R AUDIO 2 PRESET SP A ZONE 3 L VIDEO/AUX Select preset station “E1” by using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations”. Press A/B/C/D/E (or l / h on the remote control) to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. VCR 1 ZONE 2 VIDEO 1 EFFECT /VCR2 MAIN S VIDEO PHONES NIGHT ENTER RETURN 3 B SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC 1,3 1,3 2,4 2 MUTE EXIT 21 A/B/C/D/E DVR/VCR2 A CD PRG SELECT BAND 2 EFFECT 3 TV MUTE 1 TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE ZONE CONTROL DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 VCR 1 MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L ZONE ON/OFF PROGRAM TUNER CBL/SAT DTV FM/AM EDIT SPEAKERS SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE CD-R DTV STANDBY /ON V-AUX PRESET/ TUNING INPUT REC OUT/ZONE 2 PHONO PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 EDIT V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R SP A EDIT E1-A5 TUNING Using HD Radio™ HD Radio is a new technology that enables AM and FM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio, visit “www.ibiquity.com”. This unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, this unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names, album names, and genres) from supplemental program services (HD1 to HD8). HD Radio™ tuning Just as for tuning into an analog FM or AM station, 2 tuning methods are available: automatic and manual. CAUTION This unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital HD Radio station signals. However, this unit may not automatically receive all-digital FM station signals and the automatic tuning operation may stop. In this case, select one of the preset stations, or manually tune into the FM station you want to select, then set the tuning mode back to AUTO by pressing TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L). ■ HD Radio automatic tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. ■ HD Radio manual tuning Manual tuning is recommended when station signals are weak. Follow steps 1 through 3 as described in “Manual tuning” on page 41, then set the tuning mode back to AUTO by pressing TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L). Both analog and digital broadcasts are received, but when tuned into an HD Radio station, the TUNED and HD indicators light up and the frequency of the received station is displayed in the front panel. Note If station signals are weak, analog broadcasts will be played back instead even in the automatic tuning mode, and the HD indicator does not light up. 45 BASIC OPERATION Follow steps 1 through 4 as described in “Automatic tuning” on page 41. Both analog and digital broadcasts are received, but when tuned into an HD Radio station, the TUNED and HD indicators light up and the frequency of the received station is displayed in the front panel. If the HD indicator lights up, the broadcast being received contains an HD Radio digital signal. TUNING Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs Use this feature to select one of the 8 HD Radio audio programs (HD1 to HD8) when the unit is in the tuner mode. Each audio program contains data programs. Press PRG SELECT on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between HD Radio audio programs. Press PRG SELECT again within 2 seconds to select another data program. The HD indicator may disappear from the front panel display while toggling between data programs. Notes • Only 1 HD Radio audio program (HD1) is available for AM broadcasts, while up to 8 audio programs (HD1 to HD8) are available for FM broadcasts. • When reception for an audio program ceases, the HD indicator disappears from the front panel display and HD1 is automatically selected after approximately 20 seconds. • Some audio programs may not contain data programs depending on the broadcasting station and the time period. • The audio programs from HD2 to HD8 can be selected only when they contain data programs. Displaying HD Radio™ information There are 3 types of front panel displays that show HD Radio information when the unit is in the tuner mode: frequency, station and music information. Press DISPLAY on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between the following 3 front panel displays. ■ Frequency information (Preset group / FM or AM / Frequency) V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD SP A A MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER AUTO HiFi DSP PHONO HD TUNED dB VOLUME FM 87.5 MHz L R ■ Station information (Station name / FM or AM / Audio program) Station information is available when a station name is received as data in 4 alphabetical codes. V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD SP A MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER PHONO AUTO STEREO HD TUNED HiFi DSP dB VOLUME WXYZ-FM : HD1 L R Audio program Station name ■ Music information (Song title / Artist name / Album name / Genre) Music information is available only when data programs are received. If the music information is long, it automatically scrolls to the left in the front panel display. V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 SP A CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE HiFi DSP CD-R CD TUNER AUTO FM Radio - CD y HD Radio information is also available in the GUI menu (see page 55). 46 PHONO HD TUNED dB VOLUME L R RECORDING RECORDING You can use the REC OUT/ZONE 2 control to record one source while watching and/or listening to another source. Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for those components. PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL EFFECT INPUT DVD DTV A B SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 VIDEO L R AUDIO OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 1 ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM TUNER VCR 1 ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT STANDBY /ON OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO/AUX 2 Turn on the power of this unit and all connected components. 2 Select the source component you want to record from by using REC OUT/ZONE 2. • To record the current input source that you are watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 to SOURCE/REMOTE. DVD DTV CBL/SAT VCR 1 SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 • To record a source other than the one that you are watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 to the source you want to record. DVD DTV CBL/SAT VCR 1 SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER • To record audio and video from different sources, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 to SOURCE/REMOTE, select a video source first then select an audio source (see page 39). • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. Notes • The source you record and the source sent to Zone 2 are always the same. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of TONE CONTROL, (see page 60) VOLUME, Speaker Level (page 65) and programs does not affect recorded material. • A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal to your VCR. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital (or analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. • Audio signals input from the selected i.LINK or HDMI components are output to REC OUT when REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel is set to SOURCE/REMOTE or to the source you want to record. However, multi-channel DVD audio signals, DSD signals of Super Audio CD and 2-channel PCM signals over 48 kHz of sampling frequency cannot be output to REC OUT. CD DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 After this setting, you can change the source you are listening to and/or watching without effecting the recording by rotating the INPUT selector (or pressing one of the input selector buttons on the remote control). 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. 47 BASIC OPERATION 1 y SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to AUTO (see page 40) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself. For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel (stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on pages 34 and 35. Sources Remote control button 1 3 Program STEREO 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back 2-channel sources as is. ENTERTAINMENT TV Sports CINEMA DSP processing. Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. ENTERTAINMENT Mono Movie CINEMA DSP processing. This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. ENTERTAINMENT Game CINEMA DSP processing. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. MOVIE THEATER Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). MOVIE THEATER Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER General CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. MULTI 2-CH 4 48 Features SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Sources MULTI 2-CH Remote control button 5 MULTI 2-CH Features THX THX Cinema THX processing for movie software. THX THX Game THX processing for game software. THX THX Select2 Cinema THX Select2 processing for movie software. THX THX Surr. EX THX processing for any 5.1 channel source. SUR. STANDARD DOLBY DIGITAL Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. SUR. STANDARD q D+PLIIx Movie Standard 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. SUR. STANDARD DOLBY D EX Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. SUR. STANDARD DTS Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS sources. SUR. STANDARD DTS 96/24 Standard 5.1 channel processing for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. SUR. STANDARD DTS+PLIIx Movie Standard 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic x) for DTS sources. SUR. STANDARD DTS+DOLBY EX Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. SUR. STANDARD DTS ES Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources. SUR. STANDARD DTS 96/24 ES Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder. SUR. STANDARD PRO LOGIC Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. SUR. STANDARD PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software. SUR. STANDARD PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic SUR. STANDARD PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software. SUR. STANDARD PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic SUR. STANDARD Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. SUR. STANDARD CS II Cinema SRS Circle Surround (U.S.A. model only) SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder. SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS 6 Program processing for movie software. processing for game software. processing for movie software. 49 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on pages 34 and 35. Sources Remote control button 2 channel (left and right) playback. STEREO 7ch Stereo HiFi DSP processing. Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. MUSIC Hall in Munich HiFi DSP processing. This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully. MUSIC Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. MUSIC Freiburg HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high dome and columns along each side. The reverberation delay is very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs. MUSIC The Bttm Line HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. MUSIC The Roxy Thtr HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. MUSIC Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. MUSIC Classic/Opera CINEMA DSP processing. This program provides excellent vocal depth and overall clarity by restraining excessive reverberation. The surround sound field is relatively moderate but it reproduces beautiful sound using data collected from a concert hall. 3 ENTERTAINMENT Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound. 5 THX THX Music THX processing for all 5.1 encoded music sources. SUR. STANDARD q D+PLIIx Music Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources. SUR. STANDARD DTS+PLIIx Music Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources. SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder. SUR. STANDARD PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software. SUR. STANDARD PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic SUR. STANDARD Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. SUR. STANDARD CS II Music SRS Circle Surround (U.S.A. model only) 2 MULTI 6 2-CH 50 Features STEREO 2ch Stereo 1 MULTI 2-CH Program processing for music software. processing for music software. ADVANCED OPERATIONS ADVANCED OPERATIONS ■ Canceling the sleep timer Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S). ■ Setting the sleep timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the SLEEP indicator goes off. SLEEP y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode. SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B AUDIO SELECT STANDBY POWER SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 SELECT 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. SLEEP 120 min V-AUX DVR/VCR2 SLEEP 90 min SLEEP 30 min VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE SLEEP 60 min CD-R CD TUNER PHONO SP A SLEEP ADVANCED OPERATION SLEEP OFF SLEEP dB SLEEP VOLUME 120min L R The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER PHONO SP A SLEEP Hall in Munich dB VOLUME L R 51 SYSTEM OPTIONS SYSTEM OPTIONS You can use the following parameters to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ HDMI (HDMI menu) Use to edit HDMI parameters (see page 95). ■ i.LINK Select (i.LINK select menu) Use to edit i.LINK parameters (see page 91). ■ Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu) Use to edit sound field parameters (see page 99). ■ Input Select (Input select menu) Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the output volume of each jack (see page 55). Item Features Page I/O Assignment Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 55 Audio Select Selects the type of input signal to be used. 56 Decoder Mode Selects the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 56 Volume Trim Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 56 Rename Changes the name of the input. 57 ■ Manual Setup (Manual setup menu) Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings (see page 58). Sound (Sound menu) Use to manually adjust the sound parameters. Item Features Page LFE Level Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 58 Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 58 Parametric EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker. 59 Tone Control Adjusts the tonal balance of the speakers and headphones. 60 Audio Option Customizes overall audio settings for this unit. 60 Basic (Basic menu) Use to quickly setup basic system parameters. Item Features Page Test Tone Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set, Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings. 62 Speaker Set Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. 62 Speaker Distance Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 64 Speaker Level Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 65 THX Set Adjusts the THX settings. 65 52 SYSTEM OPTIONS Option (Options menu) Use to adjust the optional system settings. Item Features Page Display Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays. 66 Multi Zone Customizes the Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone B settings. 67 Sur.Initialize Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound field programs. 67 Audio Select Selects the initial input mode of the source. 68 Decoder Mode Selects the decoder used by this unit. 68 Memory Guard Locks the menu parameter settings. 68 ■ Auto Setup (Auto setup menu) Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 27). ■ System Memory (System memory menu) Use to save and recall various settings (see page 69). ■ Audio Info. (Audio signal information menu) Use to check audio signal information (see page 40). ADVANCED OPERATION 53 SYSTEM OPTIONS Changing parameter settings 3 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. (Speaker set is used in the following example to change parameter settings.) Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Set > Press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE 1 TOP PRESET EXIT TITLE MENU BAND PRG SELECT TV AUDIO A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN Bass Out 60Hz Bass Cross Over 80Hz (THX) SWFR Phase 90Hz 1 100Hz 5 2-4 4 DISPLAY EFFECT 1 40Hz PURE DIRECT NIGHT ENTER Presence Press ENTER or h, then press k / n repeatedly to change the setting of the item you want to adjust. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. The top display appears. AMP TOP Presence 40Hz Bass Out 60Hz Bass Cross Over 80Hz (THX) SWFR Phase 90Hz TITLE SOURCE 100Hz TV 5 Stereo/Surround y Input Select Sound Manual Setup Basic Auto Setup Option System Memory 2 Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu, then press h to enter the selected menu. Test Tone Speaker Set Front Speaker Distance Center Speaker Level Surround Front Center Large Surround Small Surround Back None Presence 54 Press EXIT. If you want to continue adjusting parameter settings, press ENTER to return to the previously selected menu item. Notes • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one page of the GUI display. To scroll through pages, press k / n. • You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is set to “On”. If you want to change the parameter values, set Memory Guard to “Off” (see page 68). Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. SYSTEM OPTIONS Input Select Use this feature to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. AMP TOP TITLE SOURCE TV Music information Page 1: the summary of music information (Song title / Artist name / Album name) Page 2: the details of the song title Page 3: the details of the artist Page 4: the details of the album Page 5: the details of the genre Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between pages. Press ENTER on the remote control to hold the display temporarily. “Hold:ENTER” changes to “Release:ENTER”. Press ENTER again to release it. Music information is available only when data programs are received. Hold:ENTER 2 Select Input Select, then press h. [1] 2 Station Music CD-R Stereo/Surround Input Select Manual Setup Auto Setup 3 MD/TAPE DVD DTV y HD Radio information is also available in the front panel display menu (see page 46). CBL/SAT Select the desired input (CD, DVD, etc.), then press h to access and adjust. ■ Information (Information) There are 2 types of GUI displays that show HD Radio information when the unit is in the tuner mode: station and music information. Input Select > TUNER > Information > Current Station Volume Trim Music Rename Station information (Band / Frequency / Station name / Program / Program type) Station information is available when a station name is received as data in 4 alphabetical codes. Current Band Freq. Name You can assign the digital audio input/output and component video jacks to other components if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component using the INPUT selector on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control. Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > I/O Assignment > Example 1: To assign the COAXIAL 7 (CD) jack to the DVD input. 1) Select Input Select, then select DVD. 2) Select I/O Assignment > Coaxial Input, then select 7 CD. FM 87.50MHz Station Music Program Program Type 55 ADVANCED OPERATION Information ■ I/O Assignment (Input/output assignment) SYSTEM OPTIONS Example 2: To clear a jack assignment. 1) Select Input Select, then select the input source (DVD, etc.). 2) Select I/O Assignment, then select the jack assignment (Optical Output, Optical Input, Coaxial Input or Component Video). 3) Select NONE, then press ENTER to clear the assignment. y • You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the power is turned on (see page 68). • DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD encoded in DTS. Note If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. ■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode) I/O Assignment Optical Output Audio Select Optical Input Decoder Mode Coaxial Input Use this feature to switch the input mode. You can designate the reassigned digital input jacks (see page 55) for specific audio signals (DTS, etc.). Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Decoder Mode > Choices: Auto, DTS y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). I/O Assignment Audio Select Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to signals input at the COAXIAL jack. ■ Audio Select (Audio selection) This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can select the type of input signal you want to use. Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Audio Select > Choices: Auto, i.LINK, HDMI, Coax/Opt, Analog Decoder Mode Auto Volume Trim DTS Rename • Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the input mode. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). ■ Volume Trim (Volume trimming) I/O Assignment Audio Select Auto Decoder Mode i.LINK Volume Trim HDMI • Select “Auto” if you want signals to be input to this unit in the following order: i.LINK signals, HDMI signals, digital signals* and analog signals. • Select “i.LINK” if you only want i.LINK signals to be input to this unit. If no i.LINK signals are input, no sound is output. • Select “HDMI” if you only want HDMI signals to be input to this unit. If no HDMI signals are input, no sound is output. • Select “Coax/Opt” if you want digital signals to be input to this unit at the OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks. Use if i.LINK or HDMI signals are also being input. • Select “Analog” if you only want analog signals to be input to this unit. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. * If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program. 56 You can adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Manual Setup > Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Volume Trim > Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Audio Select Decoder Mode Volume Trim 0.0dB Rename y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). Note You can only adjust the volume for the current input source using this setting. SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Rename (Rename) Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the GUI or the front panel display menu. (DVD is used as the source component in the following example.) Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Rename 1 Press an input selector button to select the input you want to change the name of. 2 Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or character you want to edit. ■ Multi CH Assign (Multi channel assignment) Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from an external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the additional front signals. Input Select > MULTI CH > Multi CH Assign > Volume Trim Multi CH Assign Decoder Mode Rename DVD OK 3 4 RESET Press ENTER to select a character type (CAPITAL/SMALL/FIGURE/MARK). Press k / n to select the character you want to use and l / h to move to the next one. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press n to change the character in the following order, or press k to go in the reverse order. Press ENTER to switch between character types: CAPITAL A to Z, space SMALL a to z, space FIGURE 0 to 9, space MARK !, #, %, &, etc. • Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input. Press l / h to select OK and press ENTER when complete. Input Channels This setting is used to select the number of channels input from an external decoder. Choices: 6ch, 8ch Note If Zone2 Amplifier (page 67) is set to “Internal”, no sound is output from the surround back speakers even if you select “8ch”. In this case, select “6ch” and set the output setting of the external component to 6 channels. Front Input If you selected “8ch” in Input Channels, you can select analog jacks at which front signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). y • To change source names in the display window on the remote control, see page 75. • This menu item is also available in the changing source names in the display window feature (see page 75), and in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). Note You can only change the name of the current input source (except for multi channel input sources) using this setting. 57 ADVANCED OPERATION 5 Front Input CAPITAL Volume Trim Input Channels SYSTEM OPTIONS Manual Setup (Sound) y Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters. This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). Note 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. ■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range) AMP TOP SOURCE Depending on the settings of LFE Level, some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER jack. TITLE TV 2 Select Manual Setup, then press h. 3 Select Sound, then press h. Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers and headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. To access these parameters, select: Manual Setup > Sound > Dynamic Range > Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard), MIN (minimum) LFE Level Dynamic Range Sound Parametric EQ Basic Tone Control Speaker MAX Audio Option Headphone STD Option MIN 4 Select the desired parameters, then press h to access and adjust. ■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level) Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. To access these parameters, select: Manual Setup > Sound > LFE Level > Choices: –20.0 to 0.0 (dB) Speaker 0.0dB Headphone Speaker (Speaker low-frequency effect level) Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphone (Headphone low-frequency effect level) Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. 58 Speaker (Speaker dynamic range) Select to adjust the speaker compression. Headphone (Headphone dynamic range) Select to adjust the headphone compression. • Select “MAX” to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. • Select “STD” for general use. • Select “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume levels. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer) Use this feature to adjust the parametric equalizer for any speaker. Manual Setup > Sound > Parametric EQ > 4 Press n to select EDIT and press ENTER to access the edit window. Test Tone LFE Level 1 Front L Parametric EQ Test Tone Front R Tone Control Front L Center Audio Option Front R Press k / n to select Test Tone or the speaker you want to adjust. • Test Tone turns on or off the test tone output when adjusting the tonal quality of each speaker. • Front L adjusts the tonal quality of the front left speaker. • Front R adjusts the tonal quality of the front right speaker. • Center adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. • Surround L adjusts the tonal quality of the surround left speaker. • Surround R adjusts the tonal quality of the surround right speaker. • Surround Back L adjusts the tonal quality of the surround back left speaker. • Surround Back R adjusts the tonal quality of the surround back right speaker. • Presence L adjusts the tonal quality of the presence left speaker. • Presence R adjusts the tonal quality of the presence right speaker. #1 0.0dB 125.0Hz 1.000 The parameter selected in PARAM is highlighted. • Press l / h to adjust the parameter. • Press k / n to adjust the Gain. • Press ENTER to exit the edit window. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied with the results. y If you want to reset all PEQ parameter settings for the selected speaker, select RESET and press ENTER. 6 Select EXIT and press ENTER to exit the settings window. y • If you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu as a graphic equalizer. • For more information on the parametric equalizer, see “PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION” on page 114. Press h to access the settings window. PARAM Test Tone ADVANCED OPERATION 2 Dynamic Range Band Gain Freq. Q RESET EDIT EXIT Band / Gain Front L Front R Center 3 Press l / h to select PARAM, then press ENTER to select a parameter from Band (band), Freq. (frequency) or Q (Q factor). 59 SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Tone Control (Tone control) Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your speakers and headphones. Manual Setup > Sound > Tone Control > Choices: Control, Bass, Treble Control (Tone control) Choices: Defeat, Speakers, Headphones Note Tone Control is not effective when: – THX (pages 49 to to 50) or PURE DIRECT (page 38) is selected. – MULTI CH INPUT is selected. ■ Audio Option (Audio options) Use to customize this unit’s overall audio settings. Manual Setup > Sound > Audio Option > Choices: Muting Type, Audio Delay, PR/SB Select Control Defeat Bass Speakers Treble Headphones Muting Type (Muting type) Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume. Choices: Full, –20dB • Select “Defeat” if you do not want to make any adjustments. • Select “Speakers” to adjust the bass/treble balance of your speakers. • Select “Headphones” to adjust the bass/treble balance of your headphones. Bass (Bass control) Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your speakers or headphones. Choices: 125Hz, 350Hz, 500Hz (frequency) –6.0dB to +6.0dB (gain), initial setting: 0.0dB Speaker Freq : 125Hz Gain : 0.0dB Control Bass Treble +6 Muting Type Full Audio Delay -20dB PR/SB Select • Select “Full” to completely halt all output of sound. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio Delay (Audio delay) Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 240 (ms) +0 -6 Muting Type Audio Delay Treble (Treble control) Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your speakers or headphones. Choices: 2.5kHz, 3.5kHz, 8.0kHz (frequency) –6.0dB to +6.0dB (gain), initial setting: 0.0dB Speaker Freq : 3.5kHz Gain : 0.0dB Control Bass Treble +6 +0 -6 y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). 60 0ms PR/PB Select y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). SYSTEM OPTIONS PR/SB Select (Presence/surround back speaker selection) Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker set when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: Presence, Surround Back Manual Setup (Basic) Use this menu to set up basic system parameters. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. AMP TOP SOURCE Muting Type TITLE TV Audio Delay Presence PR/SB Select Surround Back • Select “Presence” to use presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from surround speakers. • Select “Surround Back” to use surround back speakers when a surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output from front speakers. 2 Select Manual Setup, then press h. 3 Select Basic, then press h. Sound Test Tone Basic Speaker Set Option Speaker Distance Speaker Level 4 Select the desired parameters, then press h to access and adjust. y • Most of the parameters described in the basic menu are set automatically when you run auto setup. You can use the basic menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first. • You can reset these parameters by performing the auto setup procedure (see page 27). ADVANCED OPERATION 61 SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Test Tone (Test tone) Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set, Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings. Manual Setup > Basic > Test Tone > Choices: Off, On Center (Center speaker) Choices: Large, Small, None Front Large Center Small Surround None Surround Back Test Tone Off Speaker Set On Speaker Distance y • If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. • This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 88). Note Loud test tones will be output when “On” is selected. In this case, make sure no children are present in the listening room. ■ Speaker Set (Speaker set) Use to manually adjust any speaker setting. Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Set > Choices: Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back, Presence, Bass Out, Bass Cross Over, SWFR Phase y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. Note Set any THX speakers to Small. Front (Front speakers) Choices: Large, Small Large Front Small Center Surround • Select “Large” if you have large front speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the front left and right channel signals to the front left and right speakers. • Select “Small” if you have small front speakers. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out. 62 • Select “Large” if you have a large center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the center speaker. • Select “Small” if you have a small center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out. • Select “None” if you do not have a center speaker. The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front left and right speakers. Surround (Surround left/right speakers) Choices: Large, Small, None Front Center Large Surround Small Surround Back None Presence • Select “Large” if you have large surround left and right speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the surround speakers. The entire range of the surround channel signal is directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select “Small” if you have small surround left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround channel are directed to the speakers selected with Bass Out. • Select “None” if you do not have surround speakers. This sets the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 39) and automatically sets the surround back speaker setting (Surround Back) to “None”. SYSTEM OPTIONS Surround Back (Surround back left/right speakers) Choices: Large x1, Small x1, Small x2, Large x2, None Center Large x1 Surround Small x1 Surround Back Small x2 Presence Large x2 Bass Out None • Select “Large x1” if you have a large surround back speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back left speaker. • Select “Small x1” if you have a small surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected with Bass Out, and the rest of the frequency signals are directed to the surround back left speaker. • Select “Small x2” if you have two small surround back speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channels are directed to the speakers selected with Bass Out. • Select “Large x2” if you have two large surround back speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back speakers. • Select “None” if you do not have a surround back speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back channel signal to the surround left and right speakers. Note If you select “Large x1” or “Small x1”, connect a speaker to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker terminals. Surround Surround Back Presence None Bass Out Yes Bass Cross Over Surround Back Presence Both Bass Out SWFR Bass Cross Over Front SWFR Phase Notes • Select “Both” to direct LFE signals to the subwoofer. Front L/R low-frequency signals are directed to both the subwoofer and front channels, and all other low-frequency signals are directed in accordance with other speaker settings. • Select “SWFR” if you connected a subwoofer. The unit directs all LFE and low-frequency signals in accordance with other speaker settings. • Select “Front” if you have not connected a subwoofer. The unit directs all low-frequency and LFE signals to the front speakers (even if you have previously set Front to Small in Speaker Set). Bass Cross Over (Bass cross over) Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency are sent to the subwoofer. Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (THX), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz THX recommendation: 80Hz (THX) Presence 40Hz Bass Out 60Hz Bass Cross Over 80Hz (THX) SWFR Phase 90Hz 100Hz • Select “None” if you do not have presence speakers. This unit directs all presence channel signals to the front left and right speakers. • Select “Yes” if you have presence speakers. Note When Zone2 Amplifier is set to “Internal” (see page 67), Presence is automatically set to “None”. 63 ADVANCED OPERATION Presence (Presence speakers) Choices: None, Yes Bass Out (Bass out) LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. These low-frequency signals can be directed to both front left and right speakers, and to the subwoofer (which can be used for both stereo reproduction and sound field programs). Choices: Both, SWFR, Front THX recommendation: SWFR SYSTEM OPTIONS SWFR Phase (Subwoofer Phase) If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to adjust the frequency phase characteristics of your subwoofer. Choices: Normal, Reverse Bass Out Bass Cross Over SWFR Phase Normal Reverse • Select “Normal” not to reverse the phase for your subwoofer(s). • Select “Reverse” to reverse the phase for your subwoofer(s). y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 88). ■ Speaker Distance (Speaker distance) Use this feature to manually input the distance of each speaker and adjust the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time. Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Distance > Test Tone Subwoofer Speaker Set Unit Speaker Distance Front L Speaker Level Front R THX Set Center Unit (Unit) Choices: Meter (m), Feet (ft) Initial setting:U.S.A. and Canada models: Feet (ft) Other models: Meter (m) • Select “Meter” to input speaker distances in meters. • Select “Feet” to input speaker distances in feet. Presence R Subwoofer Unit Meter Front L Feet Front R 64 Speaker distances Choices: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Front L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker. • Front R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker. • Center adjusts the distance of the center speaker. • Surround L adjusts the distance of the surround left speaker. • Surround R adjusts the distance of the surround right speaker. • Surround Back L adjusts the distance of the surround back left speaker. • Surround Back R adjusts the distance of the surround back right speaker. • Presence L adjusts the distance of the presence left speaker. • Presence R adjusts the distance of the presence right speaker. • Subwoofer adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 88). Notes • You cannot adjust the distance of speakers set to “None” in Speaker Set. • If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the distance in Surround Back L. SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Speaker Level (Speaker level) Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left speakers and each speaker selected in Speaker Set (see page 62). Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Level ■ THX Set (THX settings) Use to manually adjust the THX settings. Manual Setup > Basic > THX Set > Speaker Distance Dimmer Speaker Level Speaker B Speaker Set Presence R THX Set SB Speaker Dist. Speaker Distance Subwoofer Information Output Speaker Level Front L Input Mode Zone 3 Volume THX Set Front R Center Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB • Front L adjusts the balance of the front left speaker. • Front R adjusts the balance of the front right speaker. • Center adjusts the balance of the center speaker. • Surround L adjusts the balance of the surround left speaker. • Surround R adjusts the balance of the surround right speaker. • Surround Back L adjusts the balance of the surround back left speaker. • Surround Back R adjusts the balance of the surround back right speaker. • Presence L adjusts the balance of the front left and presence left speakers. • Presence R adjusts the balance of the front left and presence right speakers. • Subwoofer adjusts the balance of the subwoofer. SB Speaker Dist. (Surround back speaker distance) Use this feature to optimize the surround sound field when you have to place the surround back speakers apart. Choices: U.S.A. and Canada models: under 1ft, 1 – 4ft, over 4ft Other models: under 0.3m, 0.3 – 1.2m, over 1.2m Input Assign Dimmer Support Audio under 0.3m SB Speaker Dist. 0.3-1.2m Information over 1.2m Input Mode Zone 3 Volume Notes y y • You cannot adjust the level of channels set to “None” in Speaker Set. • If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the balance in Surround Back L. This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 88). 65 ADVANCED OPERATION • To calibrate correctly to THX reference levels, use Test Tone (see page 62). • This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 88). • Select “under 0.3m” or “under 1ft” if the distance between the two surround back speakers is less than 0.3 m (1 ft). • Select “0.3 – 1.2m” or “1 – 4ft” if the distance between the two surround back speakers is between 0.3 and 1.2 m (1 and 4 ft). • Select “over 1.2m” or “over 4ft” if the distance between the two surround back speakers is more than 1.2 m (4 ft). SYSTEM OPTIONS Manual Setup (Option) This menu adjusts the optional system settings. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. AMP TOP SOURCE TITLE TV 2 Select Manual Setup, then press h. 3 Select Option then press h. Video Conv. (Video conversion) Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite (VIDEO) signals to both S-video and component signals. This allows you to output converted video signals at the S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no S-video or component signals are input. This feature also converts S-video signals to component signals when no component signals are input. Choices: Off, On • Select “Off” not to convert any signals. • Select “On” to convert composite signals to S-video and component signals, and to convert S-video signals to component signals. y When using the THX system, we recommend setting Video Conv. to “Off”. Notes Sound Display Basic Multi Zone Option Sur.Initialize Audio Select Decoder Mode 4 Select the desired parameters, then press h to access and adjust. 5 When finished adjusting parameters, press ENTER. ■ Display (Display) Use this feature to adjust the GUI and front panel displays. Manual Setup > Option > Display > Choices: Dimmer, Video Conv., Short Message, Position, Wall Paper Dimmer Video Conv. Display Short Message Multi Zone Position Sur.Initialize Wall Paper Dimmer (Dimmer) Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Choices: –4 to 0 • Converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video connections (composite or S-video) between each component. • When converting composite video or S-video signals from a VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. Short Message (Short message) Use this feature to turn on/off the short message display. Choices: Off, On • Select “Off” to turn off the short message display. • Select “On” to turn on the short message display. Notes • The short message display may not display properly depending on the type of input signal and video monitor used. • If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, the short message display is not displayed even if “On” is selected. Position (Position) Use to adjust the vertical and horizontal position of the GUI display. Choices: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right) • Press k to raise the position of the GUI display. • Press n to lower the position of the GUI display. • Press h to shift the position of the GUI display to the right. • Press l to shift the position of the GUI display to the left. Wall Paper (Wallpaper) Use this feature to select the background when no image is input from an external source. If you do not want to display the background, select None. Choices: None, Yes, Gray Note If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, no background is displayed even if “Yes” is selected. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). 66 SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Multi Zone (Multi zone) Use this feature to customize the Zone 2 and Zone B settings. Manual Setup > Option > Multi Zone > Choices: Speaker B, Zone2 Amplifier, Zone2 Volume, Zone3 Volume Display Speaker B Multi Zone Zone2 Amplifier Sur.Initialize Zone2 Volume Audio Select Zone3 Volume Speaker B (Speaker B) Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: Main, Zone B • Select “Main” to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. • Select “Zone B” if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only. Notes • If you select “Zone B” and connect headphones to the PHONES jack on this unit, the sound is output from both the headphones and SPEAKERS B. • When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Notes • When “Internal” is selected, the presence speaker setting automatically switches to “None”. • When “Internal” is selected, the Zone2 volume setting automatically switches to “Variable”. Zone3 Volume (Zone 3 volume) Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks. Choices: Fixed, Variable • Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. • Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote control. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). ■ Sur.Initialize (Surround initialize) Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound field program within sound field program groups. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Adjusted sound field parameter settings are displayed in blue. Manual Setup > Option > Sur.Initialize Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER, SURROUND, All Display STEREO Multi Zone MUSIC Sur.Initialize ADVANCED OPERATION Zone2 Amplifier (Zone 2 amplifier) Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers are amplified. Choices: Internal, External • Select “External” if you connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external amplifier connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. • Select “Internal” to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals. • Select “None” if you do not want to use the Zone2 feature. Zone2 Volume (Zone 2 volume) Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. When Zone2 Amplifier is set to “Internal”, this feature is automatically set to “Variable”. Choices: Fixed, Variable • Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. • Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote control. ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE THEATER Audio Select SURROUND Decoder Mode All • Press k / n to select the sound field program you want to initialize, then press ENTER. • Select “All” to initialize settings for all sound field program parameters. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). Note Sound field program groups cannot be initialized when Memory Guard is set to “On” (see page 68). 67 SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Audio Select (Audio selection) Use this feature to designate the default input mode this unit selects when the power is turned on and the input source (such as a DVD player) is connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on this unit. Manual Setup > Option > Audio Select Choices: Auto, Last ■ Memory Guard (Memory Guard) Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Manual Setup > Option > Memory Guard Choices: Off, On Audio Select Decoder Mode Multi Zone Memory Guard Sur.Initialize Off On Audio Select Auto Decoder Mode Last Memory Guard • Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the connected source. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). Note y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). Note Selecting “Last” does not recall the last setting for the EXTD SUR. button. ■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode) You can select the decoder used by this unit. Manual Setup > Option > Decoder Mode Choices: Auto, Last Sur. Initialize Audio Select Decoder Mode Auto Memory Guard Last • Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate decoder. • Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically select the last decoder used for the connected source. 68 Select “On” to protect: • DSP program parameters • All menu items except Memory Guard and System Memory – Load. In general, front panel and remote control operations are not affected when Memory Guard is set to “On”. However, you cannot adjust the tone control using Tone Control. SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ To recall settings System Memory This feature allows you to save up to six of your favorite settings that can be easily recalled when needed. You can save settings such as the following: • Sound field program parameters • Speaker settings • Speaker channel settings • LFE level • Dynamic range settings • Parametric equalizer settings 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. AMP TOP TITLE SOURCE TV 2 Select System Memory, then press h. 3 Select Load, then press ENTER. ■ To save settings 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. Sci-Fi Speaker SpeakerCH LFE Level D-Range PEQ Current AMP TOP SOURCE Memory 1 TITLE Memory 2 TV A:ON B:OFF 3/4/0.1 0dB MAX Reset Memory 3 2 Select System Memory, then press h. 3 Select Save, then press ENTER. Current Memory 1 Sci-Fi Speaker SpeakerCH LFE Level D-Range PEQ A:ON B:OFF 3/4/0.1 0dB MAX Reset Memory 2 Current displays the current settings of this unit. Press k / n repeatedly to select the memory number under which you want to save the settings, then press h. “Save: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of the window. Press k / n repeatedly to select the memory number you want to recall, then press h. “Load: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of the window. 5 Press ENTER to recall the settings. y Memory 1 and Memory 2 settings can be recalled simply by pressing MEMORY 1/2 on the remote control. When you press MEMORY 1, the message “Load Memory 1? Yes:Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press MEMORY 1 once more to recall the settings. 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 When you press MEMORY 2, the message “Load Memory 2? Yes:Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press MEMORY 2 once more to recall the settings. 1 MEMORY 2 5 Press ENTER to save the settings. 9 0 69 ADVANCED OPERATION 4 4 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter. Control area ■ Controlling this unit The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the AMP mode. SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Display window AMP/SOURCE/ TV Set to AMP to operate this unit. SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE PRESET TOP TV EXIT TITLE MENU BAND PRG SELECT PURE DIRECT The buttons inside the dotted lines control this unit in any mode (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, AUDIO SELECT, the input selector buttons, VOL +/–, MUTE, PURE DIRECT and STRAIGHT/ EFFECT). ■ Controlling other components The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected components. Select the component you want to control by pressing an input selector button or SELECT k / n. The name of the selected component appears in the display window. The A/B and input selector buttons switch the function of the component control area below. * Use the A/B buttons to control other components regardless of whether they are connected to this unit. Factory setting: A...LD player B...Tape deck POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER AUDIO SELECT SLEEP POWER POWER MULTI AV CH IN PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE TVCD CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT AMP NIGHT AUDIO ENTER SELECT k / n switches control to another component without changing the input source on this unit. SYSTEM POWER + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT SOURCE A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 1 6 7 MEMORY 2 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON 8 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. TV + EFFECT STEREO PRESET TOP + MUTE TV VOL EXIT MENU BAND PRG SELECT Display window CH PURE DIRECT – TITLE – TV MUTE ENTER TVNIGHT INPUT AUDIO PRESET TOP MENU STRAIGHT PRG SELECT BAND RETURN DISPLAY NIGHT EFFECT ENTER REC STEREO DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME Component control area You can control up to 14 different components by setting appropriate remote control codes (see page 81). 1 MUSIC ENTERTAIN 2 5 6 1 MEMORY 2 0 FREQ/RDS EON REC EXTD. SUR DISPLAY 7 8 STEREO 9 A/B/C/D/E 4 STANDARD RETURN SELECT THX AUDIO MOVIE 3 MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 A SPEAKERS2 B ENT. +10 MOVIE 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 MODE PTY SEEK START A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. DISC SKIP FREQ/RDS OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR REC DISC SKIP 70 EXIT A/B/C/D/E TITLE MODE PTY SEEK START EON RE–NAME MODE PTY SEEK START AMP/ SOURCE/ TV Set to SOURCE to operate the component selected with an input selector button. Set to TV to operate the television (you must set the remote control code in DTV or PHONO). REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Controlling optional components (OPTN area) OPTN is an additional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code. To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until OPTN appears in the display window. Notes • You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 73 to program buttons operated within this component control area. • The OPTN area cannot be used when “2001” or “2003” is selected in the amplifier library (see page 72). Setting remote control codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. The following table shows the default component (Library: component category) and the remote control code for each input area. Remote Control Code Default Settings Library (component category) Default YAMAHA code A LD 2200 B TAPE 2700 Input area PHONO TV – TUNER TUNER 2602 CD CD 2300 MULTI CH INPUT DVD 2102 V-AUX VCR – CBL/SAT CABLE – MD/TAPE MD 2500 CD-R CD-R 2400 DTV TV – VCR 1 VCR – DVR/VCR2 DVR 2807 DVD DVD 2102 Note 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to set up. A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 71 ADVANCED OPERATION You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 3 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The library name (ex. “L:DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. Setting remote control tuner codes Select one of the following codes to set the remote control tuner code for the component you want to use. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and the unit to the tuner mode by pressing TUNER on the remote control, then change the remote control code settings. Tuner library code LEARN Function (remote control setting) y 2602 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. If you want to setup for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component. To operate this unit using an alternative code. 2603 Notes • Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. If you want to change a library (component category), press l / h. You can set a different type of component. Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L;CD, L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN (tuner), L;AMP*, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:SAT (satellite), L:VCR * The amplifier library (L;AMP) code is preset to “2000” in order to operate this unit. However, you can switch by entering one of the following 4 codes if necessary. Setting remote control AMP codes Select one of the following codes to set the remote control AMP code for the component you want to use. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE, then change the remote control code settings. AMP library code (remote control setting) Function 72 2001 To operate this unit using the default code. To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3 features (see page 82). 2002 To operate this unit using an alternative code. 2003 To operate this unit using an alternative code. To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3 features of other YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers (see page 82). ID1 (initial setting) ID2 When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. 4 Press ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected component appears in the display window. Note “0000” appears in the display window if no code has been set. 5 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit remote control code for the component you want to use. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. (this unit’s setting: see page 86) 6 ID1 (initial setting) (this unit’s setting: see page 86) Note Remote control AMP ID 2000 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. Remote control tuner ID STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 7 MOVIE 8 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. y ID2 If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 7 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN 8 Press one of the buttons shaded below to see if you can control your component. If you can, the remote control code is correct. POWER TV AV STANDBY A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Use the learn feature if you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You can program any of the buttons available in the component control area (see page 70). The buttons can be programmed independently for each component. Note SYSTEM POWER Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn) POWER FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operating instructions for the other remote control.) 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. y AMP If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. SOURCE TV Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially available audio and video components (including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control function using the Learn feature (see “Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn)”) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over remote control code functions. 2 3 Press an input selector button to select a source component. A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD AV CD AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH IN SLEEP SYSTEM B DVD CD-R POWER TV TUNER MD/TAPE STANDBY A DVR/VCR2 POWER PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT POWER DTV V-AUX SELECT 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) 73 ADVANCED OPERATION Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. 7 Press LEARN again to exit the learning mode. LEARN Notes LEARN Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 5 Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” appears in the display window. STANDBY MULTI CH IN SLEEP POWER SYSTEM CD AUDIO SELECT AV B POWER TUNER TV A DVD CD-R POWER PHONO MD/TAPE AMP SELECT TV SOURCE DVR/VCR2 + VCR 1 – VOL CBL/SAT + DTV – CH PURE DIRECT AUDIO NIGHT STRAIGHT V-AUX – + MUTE EXIT DISPLAY A/B/C/D/E TV VOL TV INPUT ENTER PRESET MENU TOP PRG SELECT TV MUTE BAND TITLE RETURN 6 Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. “NG” appears in the display window if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5. CD AUDIO SELECT STANDBY MULTI CH IN SLEEP POWER SYSTEM B DVD CD-R AV TUNER MD/TAPE POWER A DVR/VCR2 TV PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT POWER DTV V-AUX SELECT y • If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5 and 6. • If you continuously want to program another function for another component, press SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 5 and 6. 74 • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – When the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – When the remote control infrared windows are not facing each other at the appropriate angle. – When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – When the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Changing source names in the display window 5 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next position. PRESET You can change the name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use a different name than the factory preset. This is useful when you have set the input selector to control a different component. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. ENTER A/B/C/D/E 6 AMP SOURCE TV Press ENTER to set the new name. “OK” appears in the display window if renaming was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. y 2 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD If you continuously want to rename another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6. 7 Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming mode. RE-NAME Note 3 Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. RE-NAME Note 4 ADVANCED OPERATION If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press RE-NAME again. Press k / n to select and enter a character. Pressing n changes the character as follows: A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash), and space. (Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.) PRESET ENTER A/B/C/D/E 75 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Using the Macro feature The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 77). Press a macro button CD To automatically transmit these signals in order SYSTEM POWER CD Macro buttons First Second Third STANDBY STANDBY — — SYSTEM SYSTEM POWER POWER (*1) POWER (CD area) (*2) TV — A — — — B — — — PHONO PHONO — TUNER TUNER CD CD MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN — V-AUX V-AUX — CBL/SAT — CBL/SAT (*3) — (CD area) (*4) SYSTEM POWER MD/TAPE MD/TAPE (*1) CD-R CD-R DTV DTV — VCR 1 (VCR 1 area) (*4) VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD *1 (MD/TAPE area) (*4) DVR/VCR2 DVD (CD-R area) (*4) (DVR/VCR 2 area) (*4) (DVD area) (*4) You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.) *2 When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV or PHONO (see page 71), you can turn on the power of your TV without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO. *3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode. *4 Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that component (see page 73) or set a remote control code (see page 71). 76 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Macro operations ■ Programming macro operations Macro buttons SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER AUDIO SELECT SLEEP FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START REC PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME You can program your own macros and use the macro feature to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform learning operations before programming the macro. We do not recommend programming continuous operations such as volume control in a macro. Notes MACRO ON/OFF 1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON. 2 Press a macro button. MACRO • The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. Notes • When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO ON/OFF to OFF. • While the remote is carrying out a Macro program, it will not accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation is complete. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. MACRO Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again. 3 A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Note “AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a button other than a macro button. 77 ADVANCED OPERATION Press the macro button you want to use to operate the macro. The macro button name (ex. “M:DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press the buttons for the functions you want to include in the macro operation in sequence. You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits the macro mode. Clearing function sets You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, macros, renamed source names and setup remote control codes. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. AMP SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER MCR 2: AV POWER 2 AUDIO SELECT SLEEP SOURCE MCR 3: AUDIO SELECT TV 3 MULTI CH IN PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 MCR 1: DVD 1 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “CLEAR” appears in the display window. CLEAR Indicates the number of macro steps entered Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press CLEAR again. Flashes alternately so you can set the next step 3 Press k / n to select the clear mode. L;CD (L: name of a component) Clears all learned functions in the respective component control area. Press an input selector button to select the component. L;AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control area. L;ALL Clears all learned functions. M;ALL Clears all programmed macros RNAME Clears all renamed source names. FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. Note To change the selected source component, press SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step, whereas SELECT k / n only changes the selected component and corresponding component control area. 5 Press MACRO again when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. Note “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Memory back-up If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. If the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code(s) and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing was successful, “C;OK” appears in the display window. CLEAR y Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting, if you have set remote control codes). Note “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to complete. 78 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clear mode. CLEAR Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 3. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Clearing individual functions ■ Clearing a learned function You can clear the function learned for a certain button in each control area. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 3 Press an input selector button to select the source component containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. LEARN • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 79 ADVANCED OPERATION Notes REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C;OK” appears in the display window if clearing was successful. FREQ/RDS EON 3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the macro button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C;OK” appears in the display window if clearing was successful. DTV MODE PTY SEEK START VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD REC REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR DISC SKIP RE–NAME OFF y • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 4. • If you continuously want to clear another function for another component, press SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat step 4. • Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 5 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the learning mode. 6 Press LEARN again to exit. Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. ■ Clearing a macro function You can clear the function programmed for a certain macro button. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. MACRO Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again. 80 ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME y • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 3. • Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 4 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the macro programming mode. 5 Press MACRO again to exit. Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling each component Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you can use this remote to control your other components. Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use the input selector buttons to select the component you want to operate. The remote control automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for that component. 1 2 + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER AUDIO SELECT SLEEP TV MUTE PRESET TOP EXIT TITLE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R TV PURE DIRECT MENU PRG SELECT BAND 6 NIGHT AUDIO ENTER A/B/C/D/E DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 7 DVD 8 SELECT AMP 3 + + RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 EXTD SUR. THX STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 TV VOL CH VOL – – – TOP TV INPUT 9 TV FREQ/RDS EON MUTE PRESET EXIT TITLE MENU BAND PRG SELECT 0 A 8 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. SOURCE TV MUTE 4 + STRAIGHT B MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP PURE DIRECT 5 OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME NIGHT AUDIO ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT Cable TV/ TV Satellite tuner DVD player/ VCR DVD recorder 1 2 3 AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TV power *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 CH + TV channel + *2 Channel + Channel + Channel + TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 CH – TV channel – *2 Channel – Channel – Channel – TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV INPUT TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 Input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 TV MUTE TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 Mute TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 4 5 TITLE Title Title Title Title Band MENU Menu Menu Menu Program select*5 6 ENTER Menu enter Menu select Menu select k Menu up Menu up Menu up Preset up (1 to 8) n Menu down Menu down Menu down Preset down (1 to 8) Menu left Menu left Menu left Preset down (A to E) h Menu right Menu right Menu right RETURN Return Return Return Return 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons ll Search backward Search backward VCR search backward *3 VCR search backward *3 Search backward Search backward Search backward hh Search forward Search forward VCR search forward *3 VCR search forward *3 Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward EON *4 b Skip backward Chapter/Skip backward a Skip forward Chapter/Skip forward REC/ DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec *4 *5 Direction A/B VCR rec *3 Skip backward Preset stations (1-8) Search backward Direction back PTY MODE *4 Skip forward Skip forward Direction forward PTY START *4 Disc skip Rec Rec Stop s Stop Stop VCR stop Stop Stop Stop Pause Pause VCR pause *3 VCR pause *3 Pause Pause Pause Pause h Play Play VCR play *3 VCR play *3 Play Play Play Play AUDIO Audio DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Enter/recall Enter/ numeric button ENTER VCR stop *3 FREQ *4 Skip backward e *3 Preset up (A to E) Audio Enter Display Display*5 This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button. These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO. When the remote control code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area. These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1. These buttons function for U.K. and Europe models only. These buttons function for the U.S.A. model only. 81 ADVANCED OPERATION *3 TV power *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 Volume – *2 TV power *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 Volume + *1 TV power *2 Tuner TV VOL – 0 A B TV power Power *1 *2 Tape deck TV VOL + VCR rec *3 Power *1 MD recorder/ CD recorder TV power 7 8 9 TV power VCR power *3 *2 CD player TV POWER l TV power Power *1 *2 LD player ZONE 2/ZONE 3 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit. Zone 2/Zone 3 connections You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room. • An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example). • An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room. • A video monitor for the second room. y OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT This unit • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2/Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six YAMAHA components can be connected as shown. ■ System configuration and connections example Using external amplifiers To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, select “External” in Zone2 Amplifier (page 67). ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT SP OUT Amplifier Amplifier MONITOR OUT DVD player (or other component) VIDEO IN AUDIO IN This unit MAIN SYSTEM Remote control Remote control Infrared signal receiver Infrared signal receiver ZONE 2 ZONE 3 Infrared emitter Main room Second room REMOTE OUT REMOTE 1 IN Third room REMOTE 2 IN Notes • When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room. • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 82 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 Using this unit’s internal amplifier To use this unit’s internal amplifier, select “Internal” in Zone2 Amplifier 2 (page 67). R L + – PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 Second room This unit Controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 from the front panel 3 You can control the input or adjust the volume level for Zone 2 and Zone 3 components using ZONE CONTROL on the front panel. 1 ZONE CONTROL Each time you press ZONE CONTROL, the front panel display changes as shown below, and the indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for approximately 5 seconds. Set REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel to SOURCE/REMOTE. DVD DTV Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to choose the zone you selected in step 2. SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 ZONE 2 CD DVR/ VCR 2 ZONE 3 MAIN REC OUT/ZONE 2 y 2 • You must complete this step within 5 seconds of pressing ZONE CONTROL on the front panel. Otherwise, the zone mode selection process is automatically canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROL again. • The initial setting is “ZONE 2” when both the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components connected to this unit are turned on. • If you selected MAIN in step 2, no indicator flashes on the front panel display when ZONE CONTROL is pressed. Press MAIN, ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to select the zone you want to change the input for or adjust the volume level. ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 You can choose from the following modes: ZONE2 ZONE3 MAIN Controls the Zone 2 component connected to the ZONE 2 AUDIO L/R jacks on this unit. Controls the Zone 3 component connected to the ZONE 3 AUDIO L/R jacks on this unit. Controls the main component (this unit). 4 Use the INPUT or VOLUME selector on the front panel to switch the input or adjust the volume level for the selected zone component. VOLUME INPUT or y You must complete this step within 5 seconds of performing step 2. Otherwise, the zone mode selection process is automatically canceled. In this case, repeat steps 2 and 3 again. 83 ADVANCED OPERATION Press each button repeatedly to turn the respective zone on or off. ZONE 2/ZONE 3 Controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 using the remote control ■ To control Zone 2/Zone 3 1 The supplied remote control can be used to control Zone 2/Zone 3. You can even select the input source and control components located in the main room directly from the second/third room regardless of the listening condition in the main room. Press SELECT k repeatedly to display “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” in the display window. SELECT ■ To enable Zone mode on the remote control You will be able to switch the remote control mode from one room to another, and use the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/– to control the selected room. 1 or 2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 or Zone 3 power on. 3 Press an input selector button to select the input source you want to listen to in the second/third room. The display window shows “2: name of selected input” or “3: name of selected input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode. Set REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel to SOURCE/REMOTE. DVD DTV SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 CD DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 Repeat steps 1 through 3 of the procedure in “Setting remote control codes” on page 71. A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press l / h to select “L;AMP”. ENTER Note Signals input at V-AUX and PHONO jacks cannot be sent to Zone 2/Zone 3. 4 Press ENTER. “2000” appears in the display window. 5 Enter the code number “2001” or “2003”. For details, see page 72. 6 Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. 4 You can control the unit from Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/– buttons. SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN SELECT AMP V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TOP 7 Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup. The remote control will be able to operate this unit from Zone 2 or Zone 3. LEARN 84 TITLE PRESET EXIT TV * PURE DIRECT MENU * VOLUME +/– can be used only when Zone2 Volume or Zone3 Volume is set to “Variable” in the GUI menu (see page 67). ZONE 2/ZONE 3 5 ■ Special considerations for DTS software Press SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode. Notes • The source in Zone 2 and the source available for recording are always the same. • “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” will appear in the display window only when k is pressed, and “SYSTM” only when n is pressed. ■ Turning on this unit or setting it to the standby mode SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently depending on the selected mode that appears on the display window. • When normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you can turn on the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 or set them to the standby mode individually. • When System mode is selected, or when “2000” or “2002” (see page 72) is selected as the amplifier library (L;AMP) code, pressing SYSTEM POWER turns on the main unit only. However, pressing STANDBY sets everything (the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3) to the standby mode simultaneously. LCD display Normal mode* Name of component For DVDs encoded with DTS Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the second/third room. Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. For CDs encoded in DTS To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. SYSTEM POWER/ STANDBY Turns on the main unit only or sets it to the standby mode. Zone 2 mode “Zone2” or “2:name of component” Turns on Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode. Zone 3 mode “Zone3” or “3:name of component” Turns on Zone 3 or sets it to the standby mode. SYSTEM POWER: turns on the main unit only. STANDBY: sets everything (the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3) to the standby mode simultaneously. ADVANCED OPERATION System mode “SYSTM” The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to send the DTS signal to the second/third room you will only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers). Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made when playing DTS encoded discs. * “MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM POWER or STANDBY is pressed. Note To control Zone 2 or Zone 3 again when System mode is selected and the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are in the standby mode, press SYSTEM POWER to turn on the main unit, then repeat steps 1 through 5 of the procedure in “To control Zone 2/Zone 3” on pages 84 and 85. 85 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. Advanced setup menu This menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ PRESET (User preset) Use to reset all of this unit’s parameters to the initial factory settings with the exception of System Memory and Auto Setup settings. Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” if you do not want to reset this unit’s parameters. • Select “RESET” to reset this unit’s parameters. Note 1 Make sure this unit is in the standby mode. This setting does not affect advanced setup menu item parameters. 2 On the front panel, while holding down STRAIGHT/EFFECT, press STANDBY/ON. ■ REMOTE AMP (Remote control AMP ID) STRAIGHT STANDBY /ON EFFECT 3 Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired menu item. The name of the selected item appears in the front panel display. PROGRAM 4 5 Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to change the setting. Press STANDBY/ON to save the new setting This unit enters the standby mode. y The new setting is activated next time you turn on the power of this unit. Note The remote controls and VOLUME control on the front panel of this unit are ineffective while you are using the advanced setup menu. ■ SP IMP. (Speaker impedance) Use to set the impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN • Select “6ΩMIN” for speakers 6 ohms or higher. • Select “8ΩMIN” for speakers 8 ohms or higher. 86 Use to set this unit’s ID for remote control recognition (see page 72). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control amplifier library code is set to “2000” or “2001”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control amplifier library code is set to “2002” or “2003”. ■ REMOTE TUN (Remote control tuner ID) Use to set this unit’s tuner ID for remote control recognition (see page 72). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control tuner library code is set to “2602”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control tuner library code is set to “2603”. ■ FAN MODE (Fan operation mode) Use to set the operation of this unit’s cooling fan. Choices: AUTO, CONT. • Select “AUTO” to set the fan to operate automatically according to the temperature of this unit. • Select “CONT.” to set the fan to operate continuously regardless of the temperature of this unit. < Asia and General models only > ■ TU (Tuner frequency step) Use to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South America. • Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas. ■ LANG. (GUI language) Use to set the language that appears in this unit’s GUI (graphical user interface) display. Choices: ENGLISH, JAPANESE, FRENCH, GERMAN You can select the language of your choice. FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS Front panel display system options menu This is a complimentary menu that allows you to access most GUI menu system option parameters without using a video monitor. Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. 3 Press k / n repeatedly to select an item, then press ENTER to enter the selected item. 4 Press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust. 5 Press ENTER, then press l / h repeatedly to change the setting of the item you want to adjust. 6 Press DISPLAY to exit. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE TOP PRESET TITLE EXIT TV PURE DIRECT MENU PRG SELECT BAND NIGHT AUDIO ENTER 1 3-5 A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT 2,6 y If you want to adjust another parameter, press RETURN to return to the previously selected menu item. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. 2 Press DISPLAY on the remote control to enter the menu. ■ AUTO SETUP Item Sub-items Features SETUP AUTO • Use to specify the speaker parameters auto setup adjusts. • Corresponds to Setup Type in the GUI menu (see page 29). EQ NATURAL FRONT FLAT • Use to specify the equalizer characteristics auto setup uses. • Corresponds to Setup Menu – Equalizing in the GUI menu (see page 28). START [ENTER] 87 ADVANCED OPERATION • Use to activate the auto setup procedure. • Corresponds to Start in the GUI menu (see page 29). FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS ■ MANUAL SETUP 1 BASIC MENU Item Sub-items Features A)SPEAKER SET FRONT;;;;SMALL CENTER;;;;;SML SURR LR;;;;SML SURR B;;;SMLx2 PRESENCE;;NONE BASS OUT;;SWFR CrossOver;80Hz SWFR PHASE;NRM • Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. • Corresponds to Speaker Set in the GUI menu (see page 62). B)SP DISTANCE UNIT;;;;meters FRONT L;;3.00m FRONT R;;3.00m CENTER;;;3.00m SURR L;;;3.00m SURR R;;;3.00m SB L;;;;;3.00m SB R;;;;;3.00m SWFR;;;;;3.00m PRES L;;;3.00m PRES R;;;3.00m • Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. • Corresponds to Speaker Distance in the GUI menu (see page 64). • Set the unit to “meters” or “feet” to input speaker distances in meters or in feet. UNIT;;;;;;feet FRONT L;;10.00ft FRONT R;;10.00ft CENTER;;;10.00ft SURR L;;;10.00ft SURR R;;;10.00ft SB L;;;;;10.00ft SB R;;;;;10.00ft SWFR;;;;;10.00ft PRES L;;;10.00ft PRES R;;;10.00ft C)SP LEVEL FL-----||----C-----||----FR-----||----SL-----||----SB.L----||----SB.R----||----SR-----||----SWFR-----||----PR.R----||----PR.L----||----- • Adjusts the output level of each speaker. • Corresponds to Speaker Level in the GUI menu (see page 65). D)TEST TONE TEST TONE;;OFF TEST TONE;;;ON • Outputs a test tone to calibrate your speaker levels. • Corresponds to Test Tone in the GUI menu (see page 62). E)THX SET SB Dis: <0.3m SB Dis: 0.3-1.2m SB Dis: >1.2m • Adjusts the THX settings. • Corresponds to THX Set in the GUI menu (see page 65). 88 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS 2 SOUND MENU Item Sub-items Features A)LFE LEVEL SP LFE;;;;;;;0 HP LFE;;;;;;;0 • Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. • Corresponds to LFE Level in the GUI menu (see page 58). B)D.RANGE SP D.R;;;;MAX HP D.R;;;;MAX • Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. • Corresponds to Dynamic Range in the GUI menu (see page 58). C)TONE CON FRQ BASS SP 350Hz TRBL SP 3.5kHz • Adjusts the tonal balance of the speakers and headphones. • Corresponds to Tone Control in the GUI menu (see page 60). • “BASS SP” and “TRBL SP” appear when no headphones are connected to this unit, and “BASS HP” and “TRBL HP” appear when headphones are connected to this unit. BASS HP 350Hz TRBL HP 3.5kHz D)AUDIO OPTION A.MUTE;;;;MUTE A.DELAY;;;;0ms PRch >SBch • Customizes overall audio settings for this unit. • Corresponds to Audio Option in the GUI menu (see page 60). 3 INPUT MENU Item A)I/O ASSIGN Sub-items • Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. • Corresponds to I/O assignment in the GUI menu (see page 55). B)INPUT TRIM DVD;;;;;0.0 • Adjusts the output volume of each jack. • Corresponds to Volume Trim in the GUI menu (see page 56). C)AUDIO SELECT >AUTO LAST • Selects the initial input mode of the source. • Corresponds to Audio Select in the GUI menu (see page 68). D)DECODER MODE >AUTO LAST • Selects the decoder used by this unit. • Corresponds to Decoder Mode in the GUI menu (see page 56). E)INPUT RENAME DVD ._ DVD • Changes the name of the input. • Corresponds to Rename in the GUI menu (see page 57). F)MULTI CH IN >6CH 8CH • Selects the number of audio channels input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. • Corresponds to Multi CH Assign in the GUI menu (see page 57). ADVANCED OPERATION C.V[A] DVD C.V[B] DTV C.V[C]CBL/SAT OUT(1)MD/TAPE OUT(2) CD-R IN (3) CD IN (4) DVD IN (5) DTV IN (6) CBL/SAT IN (7) CD IN (8) DVD IN (9)DVR/VCR2 Features 89 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS 4 HDMI MENU Item Sub-items A)INPUT ASSIGN IN 1 IN 2 B)SUPPORT AUD. >4600 DVD CBL/SAT OTHER Features • Assigns input sources (such as a DVD player) to the HDMI IN jacks. • Corresponds to Input Assign in the GUI menu (see page 98). • Selects the HDMI audio signal playback source. • Corresponds to Support Audio in the GUI menu (see page 98). 5 i.LINK MENU Item Sub-items Features A)INPUT ASSIGN ----> ------> DVD • Selects the input assignment for registered i.LINK components. • Corresponds to Input Assign in the GUI menu (see page 93). • “---” appears if no i.LINK component is registered. B)AUTO PLAY <---> ----> <-----X-- • Selects automatic playback for signals input from i.LINK components connected to this unit. • Corresponds to Auto Play in the GUI menu (see page 93). PLAYER PLAYER PLAYER PLAYER 6 OPTION MENU Item Sub-items Features A)DISPLAY SET DIMMER;;;;;;;0 WALL PAPER;;ON SHORT MSG. ON V CONV.;;;;;ON • Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays. • Corresponds to Display in the GUI menu (see page 66). B)MEMORY GUARD MEM.GUARD;;OFF • Locks the menu parameter settings. • Corresponds to Memory Guard in the GUI menu (see page 68). C)SURR. INI PRESS DSP Key • Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound field programs. • Corresponds to Sur.Initialize in the GUI menu (see page 67). D)ZONE SET SP B;;;;MAIN • Customizes the Zone B parameters. • Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see page 67). E)ZONE2 SET OUT VOL;;;VAR. ZONE2 AMP;;EXT • Customizes the Zone 2 parameters. • Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see page 67). F)ZONE3 SET OUT VOL;;;VAR. • Customizes the Zone 3 parameters. • Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see page 67). 90 USING I.LINK USING i.LINK What is i.LINK? Connecting i.LINK components i.LINK is a high-speed and bi-directional digital interface in compliance with a global standard approved by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). i.LINK enables i.LINK-compatible components to send and receive digital audio signals (bitstreams such as Dolby Digital, and DTS; 2-channel linear PCM signals; DSD signals of Super Audio CD) over a single i.LINK cable. You can process audio signals by selecting between the DSD Direct mode where DSD signals are directly output to DSD-compatible audio DAC and the DSD mode where DSD signals are changed to PCM signals to ensure rich sound fields. i.LINK currently supports three different data transfer rates: 100 Mbps, 200 Mbps and 400 Mbps. ■ Daisy chain connections Use to link components together in a single chain. You can link up to 17 different components (including this unit) with this method. Maximum single cable length: 4.5 m (14.75 ft) i.LINK component ■ i.LINK compatibility with this unit Use to link components in a branched configuration when 3 or more i.LINK connectors are available. You can link up to 63 different components (including this unit) with this method. Audio signal formats Compatible i.LINK components 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multi-ch Linear PCM 5.1 ch, 32-96 kHz DVD-Audio Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video DSD 2ch/5ch/6ch 2.8224 MHz Super Audio CD i.LINK component i.LINK component i.LINK component Maximum single cable length: 4.5 m (14.75 ft) i.LINK component Notes • When making connections, use a 4-pin IEEE1394 cable that supports the S400 transmission speed. We also recommend using a cable less than 3.5 m (10 ft) in length. • The system will not work if components are connected in a loop (where the output signal is returned to the original component). • This unit does not output signals not input at the i.LINK jacks. • Because the data transfer rates may vary depending on the arrangement order of i.LINK components, it is advised that you link i.LINK components with the same data transfer rates. • Do not disconnect or connect the IEEE1394 cable from this unit or other i.LINK components while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. • When connecting the IEEE1394 cable to this unit’s i.LINK connectors, be sure to confirm the orientation of the connector before connecting the cable. Using excessive force to connect the cable to the connector in the wrong orientation will damage the connector. • Do not turn the power of i.LINK components on or off while data is transferred. Doing so may stop playback. If this happens, turn this unit to standby mode, and then turn it back on. • Other i.LINK components connected to this unit need to support DTCP (Digital Transmission Content Protection). • This unit supports i.LINK (AUDIO) components only. Because this unit does not support i.LINK (VIDEO), video signals, such as MPEG2-TS (BS digital, etc.) or DV (DV camera, DVD recorder, etc.), are not compatible with this unit. • If this unit is in the standby mode or turned off, signals cannot be output to the next i.LINK component. 91 ADVANCED OPERATION Audio signal types i.LINK component ■ Tree connections This unit supports hot plugging, a function that allows you to disconnect or connect the IEEE1394 cable while the power is turned on. This unit’s i.LINK interface was based on the following design standards: • IEEE1394 Std 1394a-2000 (Standard for a High Performance Serial Bus) • A&M Protocol (Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol 2.1) • DTCP (Digital Transmission Content Protection) i.LINK component USING i.LINK Basic i.LINK operations Notes ■ Assigning i.LINK components When an i.LINK component is connected, this unit automatically recognizes the connection and registers up to 16 i.LINK components. Assigning an i.LINK component to a specific input allows you to select video and audio input signals from that component received via the i.LINK connection for simultaneous playback. Turn on the power of this unit and the connected i.LINK component. The i.LINK component is automatically recognized and registered in the following order: DVD → DTV → CBL/SAT → VCR1 → DVR/VCR2 → V-AUX → PHONO → CD → CD-R → MD/TAPE “LINK CHECK” flashes on the front panel display during this procedure. Notes • If you want to change the input assignment of a registered i.LINK component, use Input Assign in the GUI menu (see page 93) or INPUT ASSIGN in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). • Only one i.LINK component is assigned to each input and inputs that are already assigned are skipped. • If i.LINK components are assigned to all the inputs available, no more i.LINK components can be assigned, and audio signals input from these i.LINK components cannot be played back on this unit. • You can turn on/off automatic playback when an i.LINK component is selected using the INPUT selector or to select whether you want the input to switch automatically when an input stream from a connected i.LINK component is detected (see page 93). • Audio signals input at the i.LINK jacks are digitally output only when AUDIO SELECT is set to either AUTO or i.LINK as the input mode and REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel is set to SOURCE/REMOTE. Changing i.LINK Select parameters Use this menu to display information about registered i.LINK components, delete any unused registered components, or customize the operation and playback settings to be used when this unit is connected to an i.LINK component. 1 Switch on this unit and video monitor. 2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. The top display appears. AMP TOP TITLE SOURCE TV ■ Listening to playback from i.LINK components If an i.LINK component has been assigned to a specific input, perform the following steps to listen to playback from the registered i.LINK component. 1 2 Stereo/Surround Rotate the INPUT selector to select the input assigned to the i.LINK component. Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly to set “AUTO” or “i.LINK” as the input mode. V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER A.SEL:i.LINK 92 Option Press k / n repeatedly to select i.LINK Select. dB L R PHONO SP A 3 Auto Setup PHONO or VCR 1 Basic VOLUME A.SEL:AUTO DVR/VCR2 Sound Manual Setup System Memory 3 SP A V-AUX Input Select Start playback on the connected i.LINK component. HDMI Information i.LINK Select Information Stereo/Surround Select Input Select Auto Play dB VOLUME L R 4 Press ENTER or h, then press k / n repeatedly to change the setting of the item you want to adjust. 5 Press EXIT. USING i.LINK ■ Information (Information) Use this feature to display the following information: operation status of registered i.LINK components, registered i.LINK components that have been deleted, and i.LINK signals that are currently being received. i.LINK Select > Information > Choices: Details, Delete, Protect, i.LINK Status • Select Details to display the following information about the selected i.LINK component. – Vendor: Displays the name of the manufacturer for your i.LINK component. – Model: Displays the model name of your i.LINK component. – Active (connected) or Non Active (not connected): Displays depending on whether your i.LINK component is connected. – Audio (for audio signals) or Non Audio (for nonaudio signals): Displays depending on whether your i.LINK component supports audio signal playback. – Assign: Displays the name of the input assigned to the selected i.LINK component. • Select Delete to delete the selected i.LINK component from the registered components list. To delete, press ENTER. You can only delete non-active and unprotected i.LINK components. • Select Protect to protect the selected i.LINK component from being accidentally deleted. • Select i.LINK Status to display operation status of i.LINK signals that are currently being received. You can also use this feature to delete all non-active and unprotected i.LINK components together at once. Note ■ Select (Input select) Use this feature to select which registered i.LINK component’s audio signal will be selected for playback. i.LINK Select > Select > Select the name of the desired component and press ENTER to switch the input. When you select the desired component, its manufacturer and model information appear along with its input assignment. Input Assign (Input assign) Use this feature if you want to change the input assignment of a registered i.LINK component. You can select to assign the i.LINK component to any of the various inputs (PHONO to V-AUX). i.LINK Select > Input Assign > Choices: PHONO, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX, No Assignment 1 Press k / n repeatedly to select the i.LINK component you want to assign, then press h. 2 Press k / n repeatedly to select the input for the i.LINK component, then press ENTER. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). ■ Auto Play (Auto Play) Use this feature to turn on/off automatic playback when an i.LINK component is selected using the INPUT selector or to select whether you want the input to switch automatically when an input stream from a connected i.LINK component is detected. i.LINK Select > Auto Play > Choices: ← – → Player, → → → Player, ← ← ← Player, – X – Player • Select ← – → Player if you want both playback to start automatically on the i.LINK component selected using the INPUT selector, and you want this unit to automatically switch its input to the i.LINK component which has started playing back. • Select → → → Player if you want playback to start automatically on the i.LINK component selected using the INPUT selector. • Select ← ← ← Player if you want this unit to automatically switch its input to the i.LINK component which has started playing back. • Select – X – Player to disable automatic playback for the i.LINK components. This setting also prevents this unit from automatically switching its input to the i.LINK component. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). 93 ADVANCED OPERATION Information about unregistered i.LINK components is not available in the GUI menu. These i.LINK components cannot be used on this unit although they can be output to other i.LINK components. ■ USING i.LINK i.LINK display messages ■ Status display messages The following messages may appear on the front panel display depending on the status of this unit. Message Contents Flashes while the i.LINK component connection is being checked.* LINK CHECK * Playback may stop while this message is displayed. ■ Error messages The following messages appear on the front panel display if a connection or registration error is detected. Message Cause The 1394 bus transmission band is full, and no more data can be transmitted. BUS FULL Remedy This problem may be resolved by disconnecting any unused i.LINK components. If an i.LINK component with a slow transmission speed (S100 or S200) is connected between this unit and the i.LINK (AUDIO) component which you want to play back, the bus may become full. Changing the connection order of the i.LINK components so that this unit and the i.LINK (AUDIO) component are directly connected may resolve this problem. CANNOT LINK The connected i.LINK component is not recognized because the connection is incomplete. Check that all i.LINK components are connected properly using an IEEE1394 cable. LOOP CONNECT This unit and the i.LINK component are connected in a loop (where the output signal is returned to the original component). Disconnect the IEEE1394 cable, then reconnect it in either a daisy chain or tree configuration. NODE OVER More than 63 i.LINK components (including this unit) are connected. Reduce the number of connected components. HOP OVER More than 15 i.LINK components are connected in a daisy chain configuration. Reduce the number of i.LINK components connected between the two end components to 15 or less. Reconnect the i.LINK components using tree-type connections. A new i.LINK component is connected to this unit while 16 i.LINK components are already registered. This unit can register up to 16 i.LINK components. REGIST. OVER Delete any unused registered i.LINK components from the registered components list and reconnect the i.LINK component you want to register. See “Changing i.LINK Select parameters” on page 92. ■ i.LINK indicator Lights up When an i.LINK component is connected, and this unit is playing back signals input via i.LINK connections. Flashes When an i.LINK component is connected, but this unit is playing back signals input via connections other than i.LINK or no signals are being input via i.LINK connections. Off When no i.LINK component is connected. 94 USING HDMI USING HDMI What is HDMI? HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital A/V (audio/ video) interface. Providing an interface between any A/V source (such as a set-top box or A/V receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television – DTV), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following standards: • HDMI 1.1 (High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1.1) licensed by HDMI Licensing, LLC. • HDCP 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. Notes ■ HDMI compatibility with this unit Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible HDMI components 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 5.1 ch, 32-96 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. 95 ADVANCED OPERATION • Video or audio signals input at audio input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output at the HDMI OUT jack. • Connect the HDMI OUT jack of other components (such as a DVD player) to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit. Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of other components (such as a projector). • You need a commercially available HDMI cable to connect this unit to other HDMI-compatible components. Use a HDMI cable shorter than 5 m (15 ft) to ensure stable operations and to prevent losses of video quality. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. • Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks. • GUI displays or analog video signals input at video input jacks cannot be output at the HDMI OUT jack. To display analog video signals, connect them to analog video output jacks. • Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 of this unit cannot be digitally output at the HDMI OUT jack. • This unit is not compatible with multi-stereo area audio signals of Super Audio CDs. You can connect devices (such as a DVD player) to the i.LINK jack or the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. • When connected to a DVD player, audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. In case the DVD player connected to this unit does not output DVD multichannel audio signals at the HDMI OUT jack, connect the DVD player to the i.LINK jack or analog multi-channel audio input jacks. • When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio plays back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • Video and audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output at the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is set to the standby mode or the power is turned off. • When connecting other HDMI components to this unit, refer to the instruction manuals for those components. • When HDMI audio signals are output from components like a DVD player, the audio signal format (such as sampling frequencies) may be restricted depending on the HDMI video signal format. • Do not disconnect or connect the HDMI cable from this unit or turn off the power of the HDMI/DVI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. USING HDMI Connecting HDMI components See page 23 for connection information. ■ HDMI video and audio signal flow Video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack you selected using Select in the GUI menu (see page 97) or the INPUT selector on the front panel are output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. In addition, audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are output to speakers, headphones and REC OUT. DVD player HDMI OUT Video signals Audio signals This unit HDMI IN HDMI OUT Audio signals TV Video signals Audio signals HDMI IN Speakers Headphones REC OUT Notes • Digital audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks. • Audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are output to REC OUT only when REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel is set to SOURCE/REMOTE. Some audio signals may not be output to REC OUT depending on the signal type. ■ Connecting HDMI video components HDMI IN 1 HDMI IN 2 HDMI OUT Digital video signals Component coaxial Component D Component coaxial Component D Analog video signals S-video S-video Analog video signals Component RCA Component RCA Analog video signals ■ Connecting HDMI audio components i.LINK (AUDIO) HDMI IN 1 HDMI IN 2 HDMI OUT Digital audio signals Digital audio (optical/coaxial) Digital audio (optical/coaxial) Digital audio signals Analog audio Analog audio Analog audio signals ■ Error messages In case of an error, an error message appears on the GUI or the front panel display. Device Over: more than 5 HDMI components (including this unit) are connected. Reduce the number of the connected HDMI components HDCP Error: HDCP testing failed. Check whether the connected HDMI components support HDCP copy protection standards. 96 ■ HDMI indicator Lights up when an HDMI component is connected, and this unit is playing back audio signals input via HDMI. Flashes when an HDMI component is connected, but this unit is playing back audio signals input via connections other than HDMI or no audio signals are being input via HDMI connections. Turns off when no HDMI component is connected. USING HDMI Basic HDMI operations Changing HDMI parameters ■ Assigning HDMI components Assigning an HDMI component to a specific input allows you to select the video input signals from that component together with the audio signals received via the HDMI connection for simultaneous playback. You can change HDMI parameters in the GUI or the front panel display menu. Note Display Speaker B HDMI Select i.LINK Select Input Assign Stereo/Surround Support Audio If you want to change the input assignment of a registered HDMI component, use Input Assign in the GUI menu (see page 98) or INPUT ASSIGN in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). y ■ Listening to playback from HDMI components Input Assign and Support Audio are also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). However, Select and Information are only available in the GUI menu. Perform the following steps to listen to playback from a registered HDMI component. If the HDMI component has been assigned to a specific input 1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select the input assigned to the HDMI component. 2 Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly to set “AUTO” or “HDMI” as the input mode. V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER ■ Select (Select) Use this feature to select the HDMI component assigned to either the HDMI IN or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit. HDMI > Select > Choices: IN 1, IN 2 Select IN 1 or IN 2 to choose the HDMI component assigned to either HDMI input jack. PHONO SP A Display Speaker B Select IN 1 Input Assign IN 2 Support Audio Zone 3 Volume dB VOLUME A.SEL:AUTO L R or Note V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER PHONO SP A A.SEL:HDMI Start playback on the connected HDMI component. VOLUME L R When the HDMI component connected to the selected HDMI IN jack is not transmitting audio signals (e.g. Super Audio CD or DVI) and AUDIO SELECT is set to AUTO, audio signals input at the analog or other digital input jacks will be selected to play back. It may take a few seconds before this unit outputs sound. 97 ADVANCED OPERATION 3 dB USING HDMI ■ Input Assign (Input assign) This unit comes with two HDMI IN jacks (HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2). As a default settings, HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 are assigned to DVD and CBL/SAT respectively, but you may alter these settings if necessary. The same HDMI component cannot be assigned to the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks at the same time. HDMI > Input Assign > Choices: IN 1, IN 2 Select the HDMI component you want to assign to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack. Assignable HDMI components: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX Display Speaker B IN 1 DVD IN 2 DTV Input Mode CBL/SAT ■ Support Audio (Support audio) Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. HDMI > Support Audio > Choices: RX-V4600, Other • Select RX-V4600 to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. • Select Other to play back HDMI audio signals on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. 98 Select Dimmer Input Assign Speaker B Support Audio RX-V4600 Information Other Input Mode Zone 3 Volume ■ Information (Information) Use this feature to display information about audio signals input at the HDMI IN jack you selected. HDMI > Information > Choices: Input, Output Output Model --Type --Format --Input --- Input Mode Error Display Input Displaying information about HDMI video signal input HDMI > Information > Input > Model: displays the model name of the HDMI component connected to the HDMI IN jack you selected. Some HDMI components may not provide this unit with their model information. Type: displays the type of video signals (HDMI or DVI) input at the HDMI IN jack you selected. Format: displays the format of video signals input at the HDMI IN jack you selected. Input: displays the name of the HDMI IN jack you selected. Error: displays information about an error. Displaying information about HDMI video signal output HDMI > Information > Output > Model: displays the model name of the component connected to the HDMI OUT jack you selected. Type: displays the type of component (HDMI or DVI) connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Error: displays information about an error. EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS What is a sound field? A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: Changing parameter settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. The following parameters are not always found in every program. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. AMP TOP TITLE SOURCE Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only – for example, from the ceiling or a wall. Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound. TV 2 Select Stereo/Surround, then press h. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface – walls, ceiling, the back of the room – so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. STEREO 3 MUSIC Munich ENTERTAINMENT Vienna MOVIE THEATER Freiburg Select the desired sound field program, then press h to access and adjust. Munich DSP Level Vienna Init. Delay Freiburg Room Size Note You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is set to “On”. If you want to change the parameter values, set Memory Guard to “Off” (see page 68). ■ Resetting parameters to the factory values To reset all parameters Use Sur.Initialize (see page 67). 99 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP Level (DSP level) Function: Description: Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. Control Range: –6 dB to +3 dB ■ Init. Delay (Initial delay) Function: Description: Control range: Changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. 1 to 99 ms Source sound Time Initial delay Level Level Level Early reflections Initial delay Time Initial delay Time Sound source Reflection face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms ■ Room Size (Room size) Function: Description: Control range: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Time Level Level Level Source sound Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 100 Large value = 2.0 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ Liveness (Liveness) Function: Description: Control range: Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. 0 to 10 Source sound Time Level Dead Level Level Live Time Small reflected sound Small value = 0 Time Large reflected sound Large value = 10 ■ Sur.Init.Delay (Surround initial delay) Function: Control range: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels are used. 1 to 49 ms ■ Sur.Room Size (Surround room size) Function: Control range: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. 0.1 to 2.0 ■ Sur.Liveness (Surround liveness) Function: Control range: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. 0 to 10 ■ SB.Init.Delay (Surround back initial delay) Function: Control range: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field. 1 to 49 ms ■ SB.Room Size (Surround back room size) Function: Control range: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field. 0.1 to 2.0 Function: Control range: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ SB.Liveness (Surround back liveness) Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field. 0 to 10 101 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ Rev. Time (Reverberation time) Function: Description: Control range: Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. The longer the reverberation time, the more “live” the listening room environment seems. The shorter the reverberation time, the more “dead” the listening room environment seems. 1.0 to 5.0 s Source sound Reverberation Reverberation Early reflections 60 dB 60 dB Reverberation time Sound source 60 dB Reverberation time Reverberation time Short reverberation Long reverberation Large value = 5.0 s Small value = 1.0 s ■ Rev. Delay (Reverberation delay) Function: Description: Level Control range: Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. 0 to 250 ms Source sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time Reverberation delay Reverberation time ■ Rev. Level (Reverberation level) Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. 0 to 100% Level Function: Description: Control range: Source sound Reverberation level Time 102 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ Dialogue Lift (Dialog lift) Function: Description: Choices: Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 For 7ch Stereo Function: Control range: Adjusts the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode. 0 – 100% Center Level (Center level) Surround L Level (Surround left level) Surround R Level (Surround right level) Sur. Back Level (Surround back level) Presence L Level (Presence left level) Presence R Level (Presence right level) For PL x Music and PL Music Panorama (Panorama) Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect. Choices: Off, On Dimension (Dimension) Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard) Center Width (Center width) Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3 For Neo:6 Music Center Image (Center image) Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. Control range: 0.0 to 1.0 FOCUS Function: Adjusts the clearness of a sound image by elevating the perception of the sound image to compensate for non-optimally placed speakers from a lower location. A larger value makes speakers sound as if they are positioned at ear level. Control range: 0 to 8 TruBass Function: Adjusts the lower register by producing the perception of improved low frequency performance. A larger value improves bass even without a subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence of a subwoofer. Control range: 0 to 8 103 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For SRS Circle Surround SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ Decode Type (Decoder type) For MOVIE THEATER Function: Choices: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using MOVIE THEATER programs. Pro Logic / Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6 For THX Cinema Function: Choices: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema. Pro Logic / Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6 For SURROUND Standard Function: Choices: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Standard. Pro Logic / PL Movie / PL Music / PL Game / PL x Movie / PL x Music / PL x Game / Neo:6 Cinema / Neo:6 Music / CS Cinema* / CS Music* (* U.S.A. model only) For SURROUND Enhanced Function: Choices: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Enhanced. Pro Logic / Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6 Note Pro Logic x appears when the surround back speakers are available, and Pro Logic available. appears when the surround back speakers are not ■ Initialize (Initialize) Function: Choices: Initializes the parameters for each sound field subprogram. NO, YES Note If you want to initialize all of the parameters within a sound field program group, use Sur.Initialize (see page 67). 104 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. No sound Remedy Refer to page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 18–23 The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. The input mode is set to “i.LINK”, “HDMI”, “Coax/Opt” or “Analog”. Set the input mode to “Auto”. No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT, MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons on the remote control. 33 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 15 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers by pressing SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or by setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then pressing SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control). 33 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 35 The input mode is set to “Analog” while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal. Set the input mode to “Auto” or “Coax/Opt”. The signals this unit cannot reproduce are being received from a source component e.g.: a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. The i.LINK components connected to this unit do not support the DTCP copy protection standards. Connect i.LINK components that support the DTCP copy protection standards. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. — Support Audio is set to Other and HDMI audio signals are not being played back on this unit. Set Support Audio to RX-V4600 in the GUI menu. The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Turn on the video conversion function. — 26 15–17 — 40 40 — 98 66 105 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No picture Cause TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Cause Remedy Refer to page Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. 26 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 35 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 18 Incorrect balance settings in the GUI menu. Adjust the Speaker Level settings. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. 65 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound from the effect speakers The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn them on. You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. Center is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker. One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for 7ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. The output level of the surround speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround speakers. Surround is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 62 A monaural or stereo source is being played with STRAIGHT. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn on the sound fields. — Presence speakers are selected. Select “Surround Back” in PR/SB Select. 61 Surround is set to “None” in Speaker Set. If the surround left and right speakers are set to “None”, surround back speakers are automatically set to “None”. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 62 Surround Back is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select “Small x1”, “Small x2”, “Large x1” or “Large x2”. 63 Bass Out is set to “Front” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select “SWFR” or “Both”. Bass Out is set to “SWFR” or “Front” when a 2-channel source is being played. Select “Both”. No sound from the center speaker No sound from the surround speakers No sound from the surround back speakers No sound from the subwoofer The source does not contain low bass signals. 106 39 34 65 62 34 62 63 63 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator on the front panel display does not light up.) Cause Remedy The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operations instructions for your component. The input mode is set to “Analog”. Set the input mode to “Auto” or “Coax/Opt”. Refer to page — 40 Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the GND terminal of this unit. 22 The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier. The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to this DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks. A “humming” sound can be heard. 22 — Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 18–22 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks. The source component is not connected to this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. Memory Guard is set to “On”. This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cable from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. There is noise interference from digital or radiofrequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or radio-frequency equipment. The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. 18–22 Select “Off”. 68 — 15 — Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. — 107 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Move this unit further away from such equipment. TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem AM 108 Remedy Refer to page The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 24 Use the manual tuning method. 41 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 41 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. FM stereo reception is noisy. FM Cause Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. Use the manual tuning method. — 24 41 42 — — TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. Wrong distance or angle. Refer to page The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 9 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 4 AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly. When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position. When operating the component selected by the input selector button, set it to the SOURCE position. When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO area, set it to the TV position. — Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 71 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 71 The remote control code was not correctly set. The remote control does not “learn” new functions. Remedy Cause — This unit’s library code and the remote control ID do not match. Switch the library code. Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 71 73 4 73 — 78 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 109 GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio formats ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. It provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels. An additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with a previously unheard of excitement and realism. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes that have “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. ■ Dolby Pro Logic x Dolby Pro Logic x is a new technology enabling 6.1 or 7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games. 110 ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DSD Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of approximately 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the a high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding a surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. GLOSSARY ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by. It enables playback with the fullrange channels with higher separation comparable to digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ SRS CS (SRS Circle Surround ) SRS CS (SRS Circle Surround ) is a high-performance 6.1 channel matrix surround sound decoding system. It is the next-generation of the original SRS Circle Surround technology, incorporating powerful industry-first features including the dialog clarity enhancement technology and added cinema-like bass to the front channels and subwoofer. Sound field programs ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ SILENT CINEMA ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP ■ ASA (Advanced Speaker Array) ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together facing the front of the room will provide the largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which will re-optimized the surround sound-field. ASA is used in three new modes: THX Select2 Cinema, THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode. ■ ITU-R ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering studios. ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. 111 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Audio information GLOSSARY ■ THX Cinema processing THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world-renowned film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended. Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX). Adaptive decorrelation In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates – with only two speakers – the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre. Re-equalization The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theatres using very different professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment. Timbre matching The human ear changes our perception of sound depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of your head. The timbre matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers. 112 ■ THX Games Mode For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360 degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field. ■ THX Music Mode For the replay of multi-channel music the THX Music Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage. ■ THX Select2 Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2 certified, it must incorporate all the features described in THX Cinema processing and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Select2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Select2 requirements cover every aspect of the product including power amplifier and pre-amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain. ■ THX Select2 Cinema mode THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround sounds. DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in THX Select2 Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded. Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode; otherwise, THX Select2 Cinema mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay. GLOSSARY ■ THX Surround EX THX Surround EX-Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. A list of available DVD software titles encoded with this technology can be found at www.thx.com. Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home. This product may also engage the THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such cases the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener. Video signal information ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture; color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 113 PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the Parametric EQ settings (see page 59), to optimize the frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency characteristics. ■ Q factor The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the values 0.5 and 10. ■ Frequency This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave increments between 63 Hz and 16 kHz. ■ Gain This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB between –20 and +6 dB. YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your listening requirements using a combination of the above three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit has 7 equalizer bands for each channel. The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2). This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as in Figure 1). Figure 1 Frequency characteristic after correction Gain Band 1 Frequency Original frequency characteristic Figure 2 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Band 2 114 Original frequency characteristic SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 130 W • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [Asia, General, China and Korea models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ..........................................................180 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A., Canada, Asia, General, China, Korea and Australia models] 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 165/205/260/340 W • DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω .........................................................190 W • Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A., Canada, Asia, General, China, Korea and Australia models] 8 Ω ...................................................................................... 1.03 dB • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................140 W • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more CD (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R ........... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency ..................................................350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ............................................3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) ...........12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .........................................................24 dB/oct. VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type (Wall Paper) [Asia, China, Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ................ PAL [U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] .................... NTSC • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 140 or more • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) [Asia, General, China, Australia, U.K. and Europe models] .............................................................................................. PAL [Other models] .................................................................... NTSC • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Signal Level Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C) Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (Pb/Pr) • Maximum Input Signal PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) .............................. 100 mV or more CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more • Maximum Input Level .......................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Output Level/Output Impedance REC OUT ............................................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ [U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. and Europe models] • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Frequency Response CD to Front L/R ............................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-video .................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Selectivity ................................................................................ 70 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB HD [U.S.A. model only] ...................................................... 80 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3% HD [U.S.A. model only] ..................................................... 0.03% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB HD [U.S.A. model only] ...................................................... 70 dB • Frequency Response Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB HD [U.S.A. model only] ................ 20 Hz to 18 kHz, +0.5, –3 dB • Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω 115 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R [U.S.A., Canada, Asia, General, China and Korea models] .............................................................................. 86 dB or more [Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ...................... 81 dB or more CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................................... 100 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 60 dB or more SPECIFICATIONS AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) HD [U.S.A. model only] ...................................................... 80 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) HD [U.S.A. model only] ..................................................... 0.03% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) HD [U.S.A. model only] ...................................................... 70 dB • Frequency Response (20 Hz to 12.5 kHz) HD [U.S.A. model only] ............................................. +0.5/–3 dB GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General model] .............. AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [Asia model].................................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA [Other models] ................................................................... 500 W • Standby Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.2 W or less [General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less [Other models] ....................................................... 0.15 W or less • Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] 6ch, 10% THD .................................................................. 1100 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A. and Canada models]..... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum) [Australia and U.K. models] .............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum) [Asia and General models] ................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [China and Europe models] ................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D) .............................. 435 x 171 x 438.5 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17-1/4”) • Weight .................................................................. 18.0 kg (39.7 lbs) 116 LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES CABLE ABC 0030, 0035 AMERICAST 0926 BELL SOUTH 0926 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 0303 BRITISH TELECOM 0030 CABLE & WIRELESS 1095 DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 DIRECTOR 0503 FILMNET 0470 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837, GOLDSTAR 0171 HAMLIN 0036, 0300 JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837 LG 0171 MNET 0470 MEMOREX 0027 MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837, 1133 NTL 1095 NOOS 0844 ONO 1095 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 0030 PACE 0264, 1087, 1095 PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134 PARAGON 0027 PHILIPS 0332, 0344 PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904, 1904 PULSAR 0027 QUASAR 0027 REGAL 0300, 0306 RUNCO 0027 SAGEM 0844 SAMSUNG 0027, 0171 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 SONY 1033 STARCOM 0030 SUPERCABLE 0303 TS 0030 TELE+1 0470 TELEWEST 1095 TORX 0030 TOSHIBA 0027 TRANS PX 0303 UNITED CABLE 0030 ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926 CD PLAYER AIWA 0184 ARCAM 0184 AUDIO RESEARCH 0184 AUDIO TON 0184 AUDIOLAB 0184 AUDIOMECA 0184 CAIRN 0184 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 0056 CARVER 0184, 0206 CYRUS 0184 DKK 0027 DMX ELECTRONICS 0184 DENON 0900 DYNAMIC BASS 0206 EMERSON 0332 FISHER 0206 GENEXXA 0059, 0332 GOODMANS 0332 GRUNDIG 0184 HARMAN/KARDON 0184, 0200 HITACHI 0059 JVC 0099 KENWOOD 0055, 0064 KRELL 0184 LXI 0332 LINN 0184 MCS 0056 MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332 MARANTZ 0056, 0184 MATSUI 0184 MEMOREX 0332 MERIDIAN 0184 MICROMEGA 0184 MIRO 0027 MISSION 0184 MYRYAD 0184 NAD 0027 NSM 0184 NAIM 0184 OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064, 0206, 0332 PANASONIC 0056 PHILIPS 0184 PIONEER 0059, 0332 POLK AUDIO 0184 PROTON 0184 QED 0184 QUAD 0184 QUASAR 0056 RCA 0059, 0206, 0332 REALISTIC 0206 REVOX 0184 ROTEL 0184 SAE 0184 SANSUI 0184, 0332 SANYO 0206 SCOTT 0332 SEARS 0332 SHARP 0064 SIMAUDIO 0184 SONIC FRONTIERS 0184 SONY 0027 SYMPHONIC 0332 TAG MCLAREN 0184 TANDY 0059 TECHNICS 0056 THORENS 0184 THULE 0184 UNIVERSUM 0184 VICTOR 0099 WARDS 0184 YAMAHA 2300, 2301 CD RECORDER KENWOOD MARANTZ PHILIPS YAMAHA 0653 0653 0653 2400 DVD PLAYER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 0757 ALBA 0744 AMSTRAD 0740 APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744, 0782, 0821, 0823, 0857, 1127 BLAUPINKT 0744 BLUE PARADE 0598 BUSH 0740 CENTREX 0699 CLATRONIC 0815 CYBERHOME 0741 DVD2000 0548 DAEWOO 0811, 0797 DANSAI 0797 DECCA 0797 DENON 0517 DIAMOND 0795 DIGITREX 0699 EMERSON 0618 ENTERPRISE 0618 FISHER 0697 GE 0549, 0744 GO VIDEO 0742 GOLDSTAR 0768 GRADIENTE 0678 GREENHILL 0744 GRUNDIG 0566 HITACHI 0600, 0691 HITEKER 0699 JVC 0585, 0650 KLH 0744 KENWOOD 0517, 0561 KOSS 0678 LG 0768 LIMIT 0795 MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702 MARANTZ 0566 MEMOREX 0858 MICO 0750 MICROSOFT 0549 MINTEK 0744 MITSUBISHI 0548 MUSTEK 0757 NESA 0744 ONKYO 0530 ORITRON 0678 PALSONIC 0699 PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389 PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673, 0881 PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658, 0659 POLK AUDIO 0566 PROSCAN 0549 QWESTAR 0678 RCA 0549, 0598, 0744 ROTEL 0650 SM ELECTRONIC 0757 SAMSUNG 0600 SANYO 0697 SHARP 0657 SHERWOOD 0797 SHINSONIC 0560 SLIM ART 0811 SONY 0560, 0891 SYLVANIA 0702 TATUNG 0797 TEAC 0598, 0744 TECHNICS 0517 THETA DIGITAL 0598 THOMSON 0549 TOSHIBA 0530 URBAN CONCEPTS 0530 XBOX 0549 YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572, 2100, 2101, 2102 ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768 ZEUS 0811 DVD RECORDER PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER TOSHIBA YAMAHA 2800, 2801, 2802 2808 2804, 2805, 2806 2803 2807 LD PLAYER CARVER 0091 DENON 0086 MARANTZ 0091 MITSUBISHI 0086 NAD 0086 NAGSMI 0086 OPTIMUS 0086 PHILIPS 0091 PIONEER 0086 SALORA 0091 SONY 0228 TELEFUNKEN 0086 YAMAHA 2200 MD RECORDER KENWOOD ONKYO SHARP SONY YAMAHA 0708 0895 0888 0517 2500, 2501, 2502 RECEIVER (TUNER) ADC AIWA 0558 0185, 1116, 1415, 1432, 1668 ALCO 1417 ANAM 1636 APEX DIGITAL 1284 AUDIOLAB 1216 AUDIOTRONIC 1216 AUDIOVOX 1417 BOSE 1256 CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS 1397 i CAPETRONIC 0558 CARVER 1116, 1216 CENTREX 1284 DENON 1387 FERGUSON 0558 FINE ARTS 1216 GRUNDIG 1216 HARMAN/KARDON 0137, 1331 INTEGRA 0162, 1325 JBL 0137, 1333 JVC 0101, 0558, 1401, 1522 KLH 1417, 1439 KENWOOD 1054, 1340 MCS 0066 MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216, 1296, MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216, 1316 MICROMEGA 1216 MUSICMAGIC 1116 MYRYAD 1216 NAD 0347 NORCENT 1416 ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325 OPTIMUS 0558, 1050 PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545, 1790 PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293, 1295, 1296, 1310, 1316 PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050, 1411 POLK AUDIO 1316 PROSCAN 1281 QUASAR 0066 RCA 0558, 1050, 1281, 1417, 1636, SABA 0558 SANSUI 1116 SCHNEIDER 0558 SONY 0185, 1085, 1185, 1685, 1785 STEREOPHONICS 1050 SUNFIRE 1340 TEAC 1417 TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336, 1545 TELEFUNKEN 0558 THOMSON 1281 THORENS 1216 UHER 0558 VENTURER 1417 VICTOR 0101 WARDS 0041, 0185 YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358, 2600, 2601, 2602, 2603 SATELLITE TUNER @SAT ABSAT ALBA ALPHASTAR AMSTRAD ASTON ASTRO ATSAT AVALON ii 1327 0150 0482 0799 0874 0169, 1156 0200 1327 0423 BLAUPUNKT 0200 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 0874, 1202 CANAL DIGITAL 0880 CANAL SATELLITE 0880 CANAL+ 0880 CHAPARRAL 0243 CITYCOM 1203 CONNEXIONS 0423 CROSSDIGITAL 1136 CYRUS 0227 D-BOX 0750, 1154 DMT 1102 DNT 0227, 0423 DAERYUNG 0423 DAEWOO 1323 DIGENIUS 0326 DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593, 0666, 0751, 0776, 0846, 1103, 1136, 1169, 1776, 1883 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 0802, 1032 DISHPRO 0802, 1032 DISTRATEL 0111 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 1264 ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637, 0802, 0880, 0898, 1032, 1113 ENGEL 1044 EXPRESSVU 0802 FTE 0890 FINLUX 0482 FRACARRO 0898 FUBA 0423 GE 0593 GOI 0802 GALAXIS 0890, 1138 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0896 GOLD BOX 0880 GRUNDIG 0200, 0874 HTS 0802 HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423 HITACHI 0482, 0846 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM 0776, 1169, 1776 HUMAX 0890, 1203 INVIDEO 0898 JVC 0802 KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227, 0276, 0685, 1248 KREISELMEYER 0200 LABGEAR 1323 LOGIX 1044 LORENZEN 0326 MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751 MANHATTAN 0482, 1044, 1110 MARANTZ 0227 MEDIASAT 0880 MEMOREX 0751 METRONIC 0111 MITSUBISHI 0776 MOTOROLA 0896 MYRYAD 0227 NEXT LEVEL 0896 NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778, 1154, 1250, 1750 OCTALTV 1032 ORBITECH PACE 1127 0482, 0874, 1202, 1350 PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874, 1347 PANDA 0482 PAYSAT 0751 PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482, 0749, 0751, 0776, 0880, 1103, 1169, 1776 PIONEER 0880 PROMAX 0482 PROSCAN 0419, 0593 RCA 0170, 0419, 0593, 0882 RFT 0227 RADIOSHACK 0896 RADIOLA 0227 RADIX 0423 SKY 0874, 0883, 1202 SM ELECTRONIC 1227 SABRE 0482 SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280 SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303, 1319 SAT CONTROL 1327 SATSTATION 1110 SCHWAIGER 1138 SEEMANN 0423 SIEMENS 0200 SONY 0666, 0874, 1666 STAR CHOICE 0896 STRONG 1327 TPS 0847, 1280 TANTEC 0482 TECHNISAT 1126, 1127 TELESTAR 1127 THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073, 1318 TOPFIELD 1233 TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776 ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666 UNIDEN 0749, 0751 UNIVERSUM 0200 VENTANA 0227 WISI 0200, 0423, 0482 XSAT 0150 ZEHNDER 1102 ZENITH 0883, 1883 TAPE DECK AIWA 0056 CARVER 0056 GRUNDIG 0056 HARMAN/KARDON 0056 MAGNAVOX 0056 MARANTZ 0056 MYRYAD 0056 OPTIMUS 0054 PHILIPS 0056 PIONEER 0054 POLK AUDIO 0056 RCA 0054 REVOX 0056 SANSUI 0056 SONY 0270 THORENS 0056 WARDS 0054 YAMAHA 2700,2701 TV AGB AOC 0543 0036, 0057, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0135, 0205, 0207, 0478 ASA 0131 AWA 0036 ACURA 0036 ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680 ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490 ADVENT 0788 AIKO 0119 AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235, 0388, 0543, 0729, 0839 AKURA 0291 ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398, 0695 AMERICA ACTION 0207 AMPRO 0778 AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198, 0398, 0439, 0460, 0543 ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277 ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677 ANITECH 0036 APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792, 0794 AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136 BANG & OLUFSEN 0592 BASIC 0036 BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539 BAYSONIC 0207 BEAUMARK 0205 BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741, 0742 BELL & HOWELL 0181 BEON 0064 BLAUPUNKT 0222 BLUE SKY 0695, 1064 BONDSTEC 0274 BRADFORD 0207 BRANDT 0136, 0362 BROKSONIC 0263, 0490 BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398, 0401, 0695, 1064 CCE 0064 CGE 0274 CTC 0274 CXC 0207 CANDLE 0057 CARNIVALE 0057 CARVER 0081, 0197 CASCADE 0036 CATHAY 0064 CELEBRITY 0027 CELERA 0792 CENTURION 0064 CHANGHONG 0792 CHING TAI 0036, 0119 CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119, 0207 CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207 CIMLINE 0036 CINERAL 0119, 0478 CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119 CLARION 0207 CLARIVOX 0064 CLATRONIC 0274, 0397 CONDOR 0347, 0397 CONRAC 0835 CONTEC CRAIG CROSLEY CROWN 0036, 0207 0207 0081 0036, 0064, 0207, 0397, 0445 CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074, 0081, 0087, 0120, 0172, 0181, 0193, 0478, 0729, 1174, 1374 DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064, 0119, 0135, 0181, 0197, 0205, 0207, 0401, 0478, 0650, 0661, 1688 DANSAI 0064 DAYTON 0036 DE GRAAF 0235, 0575 DECCA 0064, 0543 DENON 0172 DIGATRON 0064 DIXI 0036, 0064 DUMONT 0044 DWIN 0747, 0801 ECE 0064 ELBE 0286 ELECTROBAND 0027 ELIN 0064, 0575 ELITE 0347 ELTA 0036 EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0388, 0490, 0650 ENVISION 0057,0840 EPSON 0860 ERRES 0064 ETHER 0036, 0057 ETRON 0036 EUROPHON 0543 FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136, 0265, 0314, 0362, 0587 FIDELITY 0388 FINLANDIA 0235, 0373 FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132, 0373, 0543 FIRSTAR 0036, 0263 FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695 FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235, 0397 FLINT 0482 FORMENTI 0064, 0347 FORTRESS 0120 FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291 FUJITSU 0710, 0836 FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291 FUTURETECH 0207 GE 0057, 0074, 0078, 0119, 0205, 0207, 0478, 0587, 1174, 1374, 1481 GEC 0064, 0543 GATEWAY 1782, 1783 GELOSO 0036 GENEXXA 0190 GIBRALTER 0044, 0057 GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136, 0181, 0205, 0404 GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401, 0661 GOREMJE 0397 GRADIENTE 0080, 0197 GRAETZ 0190, 0388 GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366, 0543 GRANDIN 0637 GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514, 0583, 0614 GRUNPY 0207 HCM 0036, 0439 HALLMARK 0205 HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207 HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388, 0455, 0583 HANTAREX 0543 HARMAN/KARDON 0081 HARVARD 0207 HAVERMY 0120 HELLO KITTY 0478 HINARI 0036, 0064 HISAWA 0482 HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119, 0132, 0136, 0172, 0190, 0205, 0252, 0383, 0508, 0575, 0605, 1172, 1283 HUA TUN 0036 HUANYU 0401 HYPSON 0064, 0291 ICE 0291, 0398 ITS 0398 ITT 0190, 0388, 0575 IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445 INDIANA 0064 INFINITY 0081 INGELEN 0190 INNO HIT 0543 INNOVA 0064 INTEQ 0044 INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274, 0388, 0539 INTERVISION 0064, 0291, 0404 JBL 0081 JCB 0027 JVC 0080, 0398, 0490, 0680, 0710 JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119, 0183, 0263 JENSEN 0788 KEC 0207 KTV 0057, 0207 KAISUI 0036 KAPSCH 0190 KARCHER 0637 KATHREIN 0583 KENDO 0064 KENWOOD 0057 KNEISSEL 0286, 0462 KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207 KORPEL 0064 KOYODA 0036 L&S ELECTRONIC 0835 LG 0057, 0064, 0087, 0135, 0205, 0741 LXI 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205 LEYCO 0064, 0291 LIESENK & TTER 0064 LOEWE 0539 LUXOR 0383, 0388 M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064, 0131, 0132, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0373, 0401, 0507 MGA 0057, 0177, 0205 MTC 0057, 0087, 0539 MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543 MAGNAFON 0543 MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281, 1481 MANESTH 0291, 0347 MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081, 0583 MARK 0064 MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235, 0398, 0514, 0543 MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677 MEDIATOR 0064 MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064 MEGATRON 0172, 0205 MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0277, 0490, 1064 METZ 0474 MICROMAXX 0835 MICROSTAR 0835 MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078 MINERVA 0514 MINOKA 0439 MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0277, 0539, 0863, 1277 MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543, 0636 MOTOROLA 0120 MULTITECH 0036, 0207 MYRYAD 0583 NAD 0183, 0205, 0388, 0893 NEC 0036, 0057, 0078, 0181, 0183, 0197, 0205, 0482, 0524, 1731 NEI 0064 NTC 0119 NECKERMANN 0064, 0583 NETSAT 0064 NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120, 0205 NIKKAI 0064, 0291 NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205 NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507, 0575, 0658 NORCENT 0775, 0851 NORDMENDE 0136, 0314, 0587 OCEANIC 0190, 0388 ONWA 0207, 0460 OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277, 0677 OPTONICA 0120 ORION 0064, 0263, 0347, 0490, 0543 OSAKI 0291, 0439 OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347, 0539, 0583 PALLADIUM 0397, 0445 PANAMA 0291 PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081, 0190, 0277, 0677, 1437 PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347 PAUSA 0036 PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078, 0087, 0183, 0205, 1374 PERDIO 0347 PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081, 0172, 0205, 0207, 0274, 0490, 1688 PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0119, 0135, 0205, 0401, 0583, 0717, 1481 PHONOLA 0064 PILOT 0057 PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193, 0314, 0706, 0787, 0893 PORTLAND 0119 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0543 PRIMA 0788 PRISM 0078 PROFEX 0036, 0388 PROSCAN 0074 PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274, 0291, 0445, 0695 PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205 PULSAR 0044 QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677 QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 R-LINE 0064 RCA 0027, 0057, 0074, 0117, 0119, 0205, 0706, 1074, 1174, 1274, 1374, 1474, 1481, 1574 RFT 0455 RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074, 0181, 0205, 0207 RADIOLA 0064 RADIOMARELLI 0543 REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205, 0207 REDIFFUSION 0388 REOC 0741 REVOX 0064 REX 0190, 0286, 0291 ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445 RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524, 0630 SBR 0064 SEG 0291, 0695 SEI 0543 SKY 0064 SSS 0207 SABA 0136, 0190, 0314, 0362 SACCS 0265 SAGEM 0637 SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543 SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388, 0575 SAMBERS 0543 SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119, 0120, 0181, 0198, 0205, 0677, 1782 SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064, 0087, 0117, 0119, 0181, 0205, 0291, 0397, 0583, 0614, 0645, 0729, 0793, 0839, 0841 SANSEI 0478 SANSUI 0490 SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207, 0235, 0366, 0826 SCHAUB LORENZ 0388 SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398, 0695 SCOTCH 0205 SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263 iii SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0198, 0205 SELECO 0190, 0286 SEMIVOX 0207 SEMP 0183 SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677 SHEN YING 0036, 0119 SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263 SIAREM 0543 SIEMENS 0064, 0222 SINUDYNE 0543 SKANTIC 0383 SKYGIANT 0207 SKYWORTH 0064 SOLAVOX 0190 SONITRON 0235 SONOKO 0036, 0064 SONOLOR 0190, 0235 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0677, 0861, 1127, 1532, 1678 SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207 SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445 SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119, 0183, 0205 SQUAREVIEW 0198 STANDARD 0036 STARLITE 0207 STERN 0190, 0286 SUPREME 0027 SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198 SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207 SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0478 SYSLINE 0064 T+A 0474 TCM 0835 TMK 0205 TNCI 0044 TVS 0490 TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205 TAI YI 0036 TANDY 0120, 0190 TASHIKO 0119, 0677 TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0087, 0181, 0183, 0543 TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291, 0439, 0445, 0482, 0695, 1064 TEC 0274 TECHNEMA 0347 TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677 TECHWOOD 0078 TECO 0036, 0078, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0291, 0680 TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119, 0177, 0207 TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289, 0362, 0652, 0729 TELEMEISTER 0347 TELETECH 0036 TENSAI 0347 TERA 0057 THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587, 0652, 1474 THORN 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183, 0535, 0645, 0677, 0859, 1283, 1383, 1683, 1731 TRIUMPH 0543 TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119 iv UHER 0347 UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132, 0291, 0373, 0397, 0519 VECTOR RESEARCH 0057 VESTEL 0064 VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677, 0680 VIDEOSAT 0274 VIDIKRON 0081 VIDTECH 0205 VIEWSONIC 1782 VISION 0347 VOXSON 0190 WALTHAM 0383 WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205, 0893 WATSON 0064, 0347 WAYCON 0183 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0064, 0347, 0490, 0650 YAMAHA 0057, 0796, 0860, 2900 (projector), 2901 (projector), 2902 YAPSHE 0277 YOKO 0064, 0291 ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205, 0490 VCR ASA ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA 0064, 0108 0075 0027 0305 0027, 0064, 0334, 0375, 0379 AKAI 0068, 0342 AKIBA 0099 ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342, 0379 AMERICA ACTION 0305 AMERICAN HIGH 0062 AMSTRAD 0027 ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267, 0305, 0507 ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589 ANITECH 0099 ASHA 0267 ASUKA 0064 AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305 BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131 BASIC LINE 0099, 0305 BEAUMARK 0267 BELL & HOWELL 0131 BLAUPUNKT 0253 BRANDT 0347 BRANDT ELECTRONIC 0068 BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506 BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379 CCE 0099, 0305 CGE 0027 CALIX 0064 CANON 0062 CARVER 0108 CIMLINE 0099 CINERAL 0305 CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305 COLT 0099 COMBITECH 0379 CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099, 0267 CROWN 0099, 0305 CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068, 0087, 1062 CYBERNEX 0267 CYRUS 0108 DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305, 0669, 1305 DANSAI 0099 DE GRAAF 0069 DECCA 0027, 0108 DENON 0069 DUAL 0068 DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131 DYNATECH 0027 ESC 0267, 0305 ELCATECH 0099 ELECTROHOME 0064 ELECTROPHONIC 0064 EMEREX 0059 EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064, 0070, 0072, 0211, 0267, 0305, 1305, 1506 FERGUSON 0068, 0347 FIDELITY 0027 FINLANDIA 0108, 0131 FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108, 0131 FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072, 0099 FISHER 0074, 0131 FUJI 0060, 0062 FUJITSU 0027, 0072 FUNAI 0027 GE 0062, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 GEC 0108 GARRARD 0027 GENERAL 0072 GO VIDEO 0459 GOLDHAND 0099 GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507, 1264 GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099, 0305 GRADIENTE 0027 GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267 GRANADA 0108, 0131 GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099 GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253, 0374 HCM 0099 HI-Q 0074 HANSEATIC 0064 HARLEY DAVIDSON 0027 HARMAN/KARDON 0108 HARWOOD 0099 HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379 HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068, 0069, 0267 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0069 HYPSON 0099 ITT 0068, 0131, 0267 ITV 0064, 0305 IMPERIAL 0027 INTERFUNK 0108 JVC 0068, 0072, 0094 JENSEN 0068 KEC 0064, 0305 KLH 0099 KAISUI 0099 KENWOOD KODAK KOLIN KORPEL LG 0068, 0094 0062, 0064 0068, 0070 0099 0064, 0069, 0072, 0507 LXI 0064 LENCO 0305 LEYCO 0099 LLOYD’S 0027 LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589 LOGIK 0099, 0267 LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131 M ELECTRONIC 0027 MEI 0062 MGA 0070, 0267 MGN TECHNOLOGY 0267 MTC 0027, 0267 MAGNASONIC 1305 MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066, 0108, 1808 MAGNIN 0267 MANESTH 0072, 0099 MARANTZ 0062, 0108 MARTA 0064 MATSUI 0375, 0379 MATSUSHITA 0062 MEDION 0375 MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064, 0066, 0074, 0075, 0131, 0267, 0334, 0375, 1264 MEMPHIS 0099 METZ 0064, 0374, 1589 MINOLTA 0069 MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094, 0108, 0834 MOTOROLA 0062, 0075 MULTITECH 0027, 0099 MURPHY 0027 MYRYAD 0108 NAD 0131 NEC 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075, 0094, 0131 NATIONAL 0253 NECKERMANN 0108 NESCO 0099 NEWAVE 0064 NIKKO 0064 NOBLEX 0267 NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267 NORDMENDE 0068, 0347 OCEANIC 0027, 0068 OKANO 0342, 0375 OLYMPUS 0062, 0253 OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 ORION 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099 OTTO VERSAND 0108 PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099 PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 PATHE MARCONI 0068 PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069, 0267, 1062, 1264 PENTAX 0069 PERDIO 0027 PHILCO 0062 PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 REOC 0375 REPLAYTV 0641, 0643 REX 0068 ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 SUNSTAR 0027 SUNTRONIC 0027 SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 TELEAVIA 0068 TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347 TENOSAL 0099 TENSAI 0027 THOMAS 0027 THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 v RX-V4600_U-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, March 16, 2005 10:08 AM U RX-V4600 RX-V4600 AV Receiver © 2005 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WF09590